JP2019170696A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase the attention level to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine has, as a game state after an opening/closing execution mode, a probability variation game state and a time-shortening game state. The game machine includes performance control means for executing a specific performance suggesting a game state after the opening/closing execution mode. The specific performance includes a fourth notification performance C2 that suggests the probability variation game state, a third notification performance C1 that suggests the time-shortening game state, and a fifth notification performance C3 that suggests the probability variation game state through a revival performance. The performance control means restricts execution of the fifth notification performance C3 as a specific performance, when the game state after the opening/closing execution mode is the probability variation game state and the game state is in a predetermined situation where it can be determined that a player is in the probability variation game state before the suggestion is made by the specific performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 4

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a predetermined condition is established and a transition determination such as a lottery decision is made and it is determined that the result is a transition response result. What shifts to a state is known (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-074175

  Here, in the gaming machine, a device for increasing the degree of attention to the game is desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A transition determination means for performing transition determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result;
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, there are a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low. And
Production means capable of performing production,
When the transition determination result is the transition-corresponding result, an effect for controlling the special game state or a specific effect for suggesting a game state after the special game state is completed to be performed by the effect means. Control means;
With
The specific effect is a first effect that suggests the first gaming state, a second effect that suggests the second gaming state, and the first gaming state, and the execution of the second effect. It is selected and executed from a plurality of types of effects including a third effect to be performed later,
The effect control means is configured such that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state, and the player makes the first game state before the suggestion is performed by the specific effect. In a predetermined situation in which it can be determined that there is a limiting effect for restricting execution of the third effect as the specific effect.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to a game.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) is a front view of a 1st result display part, (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the area | region including a 1st result display part and its front side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a stop result table. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of detachment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an effect control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process performed in MPU of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the grasp process of a specific state. It is a flowchart which shows the game process effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process for opening and closing execution modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st alerting | reporting effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd alerting | reporting effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 3rd alerting | reporting effect. It is a flowchart which shows 7R probability change production determination processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 4th notification effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 5th alerting | reporting effect. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the flow of a memory | storage and deletion process of a stop picture. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the selection process of a back alert | report effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 7R probability change production | presentation determination process which concerns on the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the 7R probability change production | presentation determination process which concerns on the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 6th notification production. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the round effect of the 5th round with the case where a 3rd alerting effect and a 4th alerting effect are performed, and the case where a 6th alerting effect is performed. (A) is a flowchart showing a round effect process according to the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram showing a RAM storage area in the effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production process for round. It is a flowchart which shows 7R probability change production determination processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the selection aspect of a back alerting | reporting effect. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening / closing aspect of a variable prize-winning apparatus, (c) demonstrates a stop result table. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening / closing execution mode effect process, (b) is a flowchart showing the 15R big hit A effect process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the selection aspect of a back alerting | reporting effect. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific alerting | reporting. (A) is a flowchart which shows the change start process which concerns on 5th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the memory area of RAM in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of detachment. (A) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating completion | finish conditions of a time-saving gaming state, (b), (c) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect aspect. It is a figure which shows another example of 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is a rotation base end side and the right side is a rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 33, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, A main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 33. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to each operating port 33, 34, it is preferable to set the payout number related to the variable winning device 32 larger than the payout number related to each operating port 33, 34.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 34a will be described. The electric accessory 34a has a closed state (a non-supported state or a non-guided state) in which a game ball is difficult to win in the lower operating port 34, and an open state (a supported state or a guided state) in which a game ball is more likely to win than in the closed state. Can be switched to.

  The operating port case constituting the upper operating port 33 projects to the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case (that is, the left and right width of the upper operating port 33) is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is left and right when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the installation interval between both the operating ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, in the middle of the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above. Until the object 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side of the operating port case and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  In addition to the configuration in which the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 is substantially trapezoidal as described above, the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 has a two-stage configuration having a narrow upper width and a lower width, A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on each of the left and right sides, or an obstruction nail may be implanted obliquely below the operating port case.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the opening / closing execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decoration member 39, a part of the plurality of general winning ports 31 described above is installed in a state of being opened upward.

  In the main display section 43, when the variable winning device 32 enters the opening / closing execution mode (or when the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating opening 33, and the lower operating opening 34 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening (display of the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot game) is started at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, the first result display section AS will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front view of the first result display portion AS, and FIG. 5B is a longitudinal sectional view of the first result display portion AS and a region including the front side thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, a segment display device 101 is provided in the first result display section AS. A display area 105 is formed on the display surface of the segment display 101, and the display area 105 is provided with seven display segments SG1 to SG7. Each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by turning on or off the individual light sources, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on, or an arbitrary combination A plurality of display segments can be turned on. In addition, since each said individual light source irradiates the light of the same color, the display by display segments SG1-SG7 is made by a single color.

  Each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is linear in a front view from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and in the display area 105, each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 is arranged in the shape of the number “8”. Are arranged. Then, by controlling which of these display segments SG1 to SG7 is lit, it is possible to display a plurality of types of patterns having different appearances.

  In the display area 105, the display segments SG1 to SG7 are repeatedly lit and extinguished using a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and a variable display (variable display or switching display) is performed. Then, after the variable display is performed, the display segments SG1 to SG7 set as the lighting target are continuously lit over the stop display period, and the pattern as the stop result is displayed. Thereby, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is clearly shown.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the segment display 101 is mounted on the display substrate 102. The display substrate 102 is electrically connected to a main controller 81, which will be described later, through electrical wiring. When the drive signal is output from the main controller 81 to the display substrate 102, the display segments SG1 to SG7 are displayed. Illuminated. The display substrate 102 is positioned with respect to the decoration member 39 so that the entire display area 105 of the segment display device 101 is exposed from the opening 30 provided in the decoration member 39, and is fixed from the back side of the decoration member 39. ing.

  A cover panel 103 is provided in front of the segment display 101 so as to face the display area 105. The cover panel 103 is disposed so as to close the opening 30 of the decorative member 39 from the rear, and is translucent so that the display of the display area 105 can be visually recognized through the window panel 62 and the cover panel 103 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Is formed. Specifically, the cover panel 103 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin.

  By making the cover panel 103 translucent in this way, the display on the first result display unit AS can be visually recognized, and the display on the first result display unit AS is more conspicuous than when the cover panel 103 is colorless and transparent. It can be difficult. Thereby, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the symbol display device 41, which will be described later, rather than the display in the first result display section AS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover panel 103 may be formed to be colorless and transparent, or the cover panel 103 may be omitted.

  In the second result display section BS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the lower operation port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Although the detailed description by illustration is omitted, the second result display unit BS is also configured to include the segment display unit 101, the display substrate 102, and the cover panel 103 shown in FIG. 5 in the same manner as the first result display unit AS. Has been.

  In addition, in the 1st result display part AS and the 2nd result display part BS, as long as it is possible to respectively display a plurality of types of patterns, the shapes and arrangement modes of the display segments SG1 to SG7 are arbitrary. . Furthermore, the number of display segments is not limited to seven, and may be configured to use six or fewer segments or eight or more segments.

  Moreover, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each of the display segments SG1 to SG7 are the same, and a different color may be displayed for each of the display segments SG1 to SG7. Any or all display segments It is good also as a structure which can change suitably the color displayed in SG1-SG7. Moreover, the structure which controls lighting or light extinction of each display segment SG1-SG7 by carrying out on-off control of a light source is not essential, and if display control can be performed in each display segment SG1-SG7 individually, A segment indicator may be constituted by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display.

  Furthermore, instead of applying segment display to each display area, a configuration may be adopted in which a picture is displayed by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  The accessory display unit 44 shown in FIG. 4 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, although the display part 44 for an accessory is provided with the segment display which has several segments similarly to each said result display part AS and BS, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device Or other display devices.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols that are a kind of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  The display screen G of the symbol display device 41 has a display area larger than the result display portions AS and BS in the main display portion 43. Further, in the front view from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the main display unit 43 is disposed closer to the end of the game board 24 (one of the left and right ends), whereas the symbol display device 41 is a game board. 24 is arranged closer to the center. That is, the symbol display device 41 is arranged so as to be more easily noticed by the player than the main display unit 43. In addition, in detail about the arrangement position of the main display part 43, in the state which the front door frame 14 was closed with respect to the inner frame 13, window part 61 (by front view from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (front door frame 14 front)). It is the end of the region visible through the window panel 62) or a position near the end. In other words, the main display unit 43 is provided at a location that is visible to the player but is not easily noticeable by the player in a normal game form.

  In the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42, a first reserved light emitting unit 45 corresponding to the first result display unit AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operating port 33 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the first holding light emitting unit 45 is turned on. A second reserved light emitting unit 46 corresponding to the second result display unit BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper right part on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the lower operation port 34 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by turning on the second on-hold light emitting unit 46. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first reserved light emitting unit 45 and the second reserved light emitting unit 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  A third reserved light emitting unit 47 corresponding to the accessory display unit 44 is provided below the center frame 42. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding light emitting unit 47. In addition, the structure etc. which each hold | maintain light emission parts 45-47 are displayed by a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 has a window portion 61 that allows almost the entire game area PE to be viewed from the front. It is formed (see FIG. 1 or FIG. 2). As shown in FIG. 1, the window portion 61 has a substantially elliptic shape, and the above-described window panel 62 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display light emitting part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting unit 63, speaker units 64 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. The upper bulging portion 65 is provided with an upper pan 71 that opens upward, and the lower bulging portion 66 is provided with a lower pan 72 that also opens upward. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Further, in the upper bulging portion 65, an area for directing the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an effect operation portion 75 (specifically, an operation button) that is manually operated by the player. The effect operation unit 75 is provided with an operation unit detection sensor 75a (see FIG. 6) for detecting whether or not the operation unit 75 is operated. The operation unit detection sensor 75a is an effect control described later. It is electrically connected to the device 82. For example, when the effect operation unit 75 is manually operated in accordance with the suggestion displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a detection signal to that effect is output from the operation unit detection sensor 75a, and the symbol display device The production contents on the display screen 41 of 41 or the like are switched to predetermined production contents corresponding to the same operation.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and an effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 83 made of, for example. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The effect control device 82 includes an effect control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81, and the effect control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. 84 is housed and configured.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a synthetic resin having transparency, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81 and the production control device 82 from the rear. ing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 on the upper edge side. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. When changing state such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time it is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for signal output (or during the transition to the state). And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 and a payout control device 97 provided in the main control device 81 are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205.

  Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. The various sensors include a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, a general winning port winning sensor 31 a for detecting a winning to the through gate 35, a large winning port winning sensor 32 c, An upper working port winning sensor 33b, a lower working port winning sensor 34b, a through winning sensor 35a, and the like are provided. In the MPU 202, a winning determination (entrance determination) or the like is made for each winning portion based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 32c, 33b, 34b, and 35a. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an effect control device 82 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97 based on a winning determination result to a prize ball-corresponding entry part corresponding to a prize ball being paid out. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a probability change stop result command, a change end command, a high frequency support end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable prize driving unit 32d that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable prize winning device 32, an electric combination driving unit 34c that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32d so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34c so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main display section is operated in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display part RS in 43 is executed.

  Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal 99, information on entrance to the various entrances and jackpots to the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side. The information regarding the lottery result such as is output. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the state and the like of the pachinko machine 10 by the hall computer HC.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The production control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and each of the on-hold light emitting units 45 to 47 provided on the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and speaker unit provided on the front door frame 14. In addition to driving and controlling 64, the display control device 212 is controlled.

  In the display control device 212, display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the effect control device 82. In this case, in the production control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the symbol display time on the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. The lottery of the presence / absence of reach and the contents of reach production is executed.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the jackpot result.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbol (Fig. 7 (g)) with the number "7" corresponds to "specific symbol", and when the same specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed, the probable big hit Results are generated. The main symbol with the number “4” (FIG. 7D) corresponds to “non-specific symbol”, and when the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed, the normal jackpot result is usually appear. The remaining main symbols with the numbers “1” to “3”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9” correspond to “chance symbols (implicit symbols)” and are identical. If the chance symbol combination is stopped and displayed, a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is generated. In other words, when the same chance symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, there is a case where a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is obtained.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, a first hold display area Ga is set on the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, and a second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the lower part of the display screen G. Has been.

  The first hold display area Ga is partitioned and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the upper working port 33 are arranged in the left-right direction. . Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 is four, and the first reserved display area Ga corresponding to this is the first unit reserved display area Ga1, second A unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball is displayed in the upper operation port 33. When the number of holds when winning is 4, the predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4.

  In addition, the second hold display area Gb is partitioned and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is arranged in the left-right direction. ing. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the lower operating hole 34 is four, and the second reserved display area Gb is associated with the first unit reserved display area Gb1, second A unit hold display area Gb2, a third unit hold display area Gb3, and a fourth unit hold display area Gb4 are set.

  For example, if the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 1, the hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Gb1, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. In the case where the number of holds is 4, the hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Gb1 to the fourth unit hold display area Gb4.

<Electrical Configuration for Performing Various Lottery in MPU 202 of Main Controller 81>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display of the main display unit 43, setting of effect contents of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation type counter for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is obtained when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs. The stored information is stored in a reserved ball storage area 232 as an acquisition information storage means.

  The reserved ball storage area 232 includes a reserved area RE composed of a first result display area reserved area Ra and a second result display area reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The holding areas Ra and Rb have a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, respectively, and a lottery counter buffer according to the winning history of the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. Each piece of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the H.231 is stored as hold information in any area. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area to the fourth area, the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area when the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in order of area. By providing four areas in this way, a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are held and stored. The reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area is used to specify the number in which the winning history for the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored. To store information.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and at the start of one game round, the execution area AE Based on the various pieces of numerical information stored in the table, the determination of success or failure is performed.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), it returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for the big win is, for example, two, and the probability of the big win is 1/300. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is, for example, 20, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/30. As described above, in each success / failure table, the random number value is set so that the probability of winning the big hit is higher in the success / failure table for the high probability mode than in the success / failure table for the low probability mode. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  Further, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value which is a big win.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that one by one is added in order within the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 19), it returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. In addition to the difference in the number of rounds executed in the open / close execution mode, these multiple jackpot results are (1) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the end of the open / close execution mode, and (2) It is set by providing a difference between the two conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operating port 34.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area PE, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is provided. The low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency guide state) ) And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 1/2) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  Note that the high frequency support mode is used to increase the winning frequency of the lower operation port 34 per unit time (for example, 1 minute) or the number of unit balls of the game ball (for example, 100) than the low frequency support mode. The configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the configuration may be such that the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery is increased. Further, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode may be set by making any one condition or any combination of conditions among the number of times, the opening time, and the winning probability different.

  The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. The distribution table shown in FIG. 10 shows a case where a winning to the upper working port 33 occurs (for the first result display unit AS) and a case where a winning to the lower working port 34 occurs (for the second result display unit BS). And are commonly used.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the allocation table, a 15R probability variable jackpot result, a 7R probability variable jackpot result, a 7R normal jackpot result, and a 3R normal jackpot result are set as the game result allocation destinations.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is that, after 15 round games have been executed, the winning lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high frequency support mode It is a jackpot result. The round game means that the period during which the grand prize winning opening 32a is opened reaches a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration), and a predetermined upper limit winning number of game balls enter the grand prize winning opening 32a. A game that continues until one of the two conditions is met. A round game is equivalent to a unit game.

  The 7R probability variation jackpot result is that, after seven round games have been executed, the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high frequency support mode It is a jackpot result. In the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode that are set when the 15R probability variation jackpot result is reached and the 7R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the lottery result in the success / failure lottery results in the jackpot result (open / close execution mode) Continue until you move to.

  The 7R regular jackpot result is that after seven round games are executed, the winning / losing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high frequency support mode. It is a jackpot result. The 3R normal jackpot result is that after three round games are executed, the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode, and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high frequency support mode. It is a jackpot result. The high-frequency support mode that is set when the 7R normal jackpot result is reached and when the 3R normal jackpot result is reached is when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. Accordingly, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 19”, “0” and “1” correspond to the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and “2” to “11” correspond to the 7R probability variation jackpot result. “12” to “17” correspond to the 7R normal jackpot result, and “18” and “19” correspond to the 3R normal jackpot result. That is, in this embodiment, when winning a jackpot, the probability of a probable jackpot result is 12/20, and when winning a jackpot, the probability of becoming a high probability mode is higher than the probability of becoming a low probability mode. It has become. The probability of a 7R probability variable jackpot result is 10/20, whereas the probability of a 7R normal jackpot result is 6/20. That is, when winning a round of 7 rounds, it is easier to shift to the high probability mode than to the low probability mode.

  In the present embodiment, a common distribution table is used for a case where a winning is made to the upper working port 33 and a case where a winning is made to the lower working port 34, but the first result display unit It is good also as a structure using a separate allocation table for AS and for 2nd result display part BS. Further, the allocation of the jackpot type counter C2 to each game result is not limited to that shown in FIG. 10, and can be arbitrarily set.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game display that includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) and is in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started and the stop display result is derived and displayed. The display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the symbol variation display, a jackpot symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 8 will be specifically described. First, high-speed fluctuation display is started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or difficult to recognize which symbol is displayed. Thereafter, the variation display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can easily or can recognize the symbol displayed. Then, the fluctuation display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and the fluctuation display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display. Thereafter, the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. In this case, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. When the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, and the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is attached. Is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. It is done. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The variation type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to be in an open state.

  The MPU 202 uses the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

<Various types of processing executed by main controller 81>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. In the reading process, the state of the various detection sensors 31a, 32c, 33b, 34b, and 35a is read, the state of the various detection sensors 31a, 32c, 33b, 34b, and 35a is determined, and the process of storing the detection information is executed. . In addition, when a winning of a game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 31a, 32c, 33b, and 34b corresponding to the generation of a prize ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when a prize winning to the variable prize winning device 32 is detected by the winning prize winning prize sensor 32c, a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is set. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 35. In the through-winning process, when a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored item holdings stored in the electronic combination holding area 233 is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 233. Moreover, the process for lighting the 3rd holding | maintenance light emission part 47 corresponding to the effect holding | maintenance memory | storage number with respect to the production | presentation control apparatus 82 is performed.

  Thereafter, after the winning process for the operation port is executed in step S105, the timer interruption process is terminated. In the winning process for the operating port, based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in either of the operating ports 33 and 34, a winning ball command for setting the game ball to be paid out is set based on the winning and a jackpot random number counter Information acquisition processing for storing each value of C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is performed.

  In the information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the upper working port 33. When the upper operating port 33 has been won, the number of pieces of hold information stored in the first result display unit hold area Ra is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the first start hold memory number RaN. . On the other hand, if the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won (started winning) the lower working port 34. When winning the lower operating port 34, the number of hold information stored in the second result display section holding area Rb is grasped, and the grasped number is set as the second start hold memory number RbN. . Then, it is determined whether or not the set start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start pending storage number N in the corresponding result display area reservation area is updated so as to increase by one. Then, when the first start reserved memory number RaN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS are set to the first result display unit reserved area Ra. Stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas and the second start-pending storage number RbN is set, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS Each value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second result display area reservation area Rb. Then, the process for lighting the 1st reservation light emission part 45 or the 2nd reservation light emission part 46 corresponding to the start reservation memory | storage number with respect to the production | presentation control apparatus 82 is performed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As its outline, the processing of steps S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal process, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S201. In the external signal output process in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, if an effect command is set, it is transmitted to the effect control device 82.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game times control process, determination of success / failure of jackpot or the like and allocation determination of jackpot type are performed, and the change display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, the setting of change display in the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

  After performing the game times control process of step S203, it progresses to step S204 and performs a game state transfer process. With this gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to an opening / closing execution mode or the like. Details of the game turn control process in step S203 and the game state transition process in step S204 will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S205, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the electronic combination release whether or not to open the electric combination 34a using the numerical information acquired from the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electronic combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 is determined. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Thereafter, in step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 204. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 115 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 202, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S208, that is, the current normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. In step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the access to the RAM 204 is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an opening / closing execution mode flag is stored (stored) in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processing after step S302, that is, the game turn start processing in steps S303 to S305 and the game turn progress processing in steps S306 to S310. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The variable display flag is stored when variable display is started for either the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS, and is erased when the variable display ends.

  When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn starting process in steps S303 to S305. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S303, it is determined whether or not the common pending number CRN, which is the sum of the number of start pending storages in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS, is “0”. The case where the common reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory numbers RaN and RbN are “0” for both the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is.

  If the common hold number CRN is not “0”, in order to set the data stored in the first result display portion reservation area Ra or the second result display portion reservation area Rb in step S304 for variable display. In step S305, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is performed.

  Here, the fluctuation start process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored (stored) in various flag storage areas 235 provided in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode relating to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and then is shifted to a new opening / closing execution mode and is erased at the start of the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is not the high probability mode, whether or not it is determined is made by referring to the determination table for the low probability mode in step S402. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches one of the two values set as the jackpot winning value in the low probability mode winning / failing table. Determine. On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode, in step S403, the determination is made with reference to the high probability mode determination table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches any of the 20 values set as the jackpot winning value in the high probability mode winning / failing table. Determine.

  After step S402 or step S403 is executed, in step S404 to step S412, the process for setting the game result (big hit type) of the current game round, or the first result display section AS or the (2) A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed in one of the result display units BS is ended is executed. In this case, when setting the stop result, various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area 224 (stop result information group storage means) of the ROM 203 are referred to.

  Specifically, first, in step S404, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S402 or step S403 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S405 to S411, a process for setting a game result and a process for setting a stop result in the case of a big win are executed.

  In step S405, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table (see FIG. 10). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE (see FIG. 9) in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 is a numerical range of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, a numerical range of the 7R probability variation jackpot result, It is determined whether it is included in the numerical range of the 7R normal jackpot result or the numerical range of the 3R normal jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S406, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S405 is a probability variation jackpot result. If it is a probability variation jackpot result, in step S407, processing for setting a stop result for probability variation jackpot is executed. This step is to set a probability winning jackpot pattern to be stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS. Specifically, the picture is set with reference to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203.

  Here, the stop result table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 15, in the stop result table, stop result data is stored in association with the value of the jackpot type counter C2. As already described, each of the result display sections AS and BS is provided with a plurality of display segments SG1 to SG7 (see FIG. 5) as means for displaying the stop result. Of the display segments SG1 to SG7, the information indicates which display segment is turned on and which display segment is turned off.

  For example, the stop result data A1 when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “0” is to turn on the display segments SG1, SG6, SG7 and turn off the display segments SG2 to SG5. For this reason, when stop result data A1 is set as the stop result, a pattern similar to the number “7” is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS.

  Each pattern shown in the “result display” column of FIG. 15 indicates a pattern displayed by each stop result data A1 to D2. It should be noted that the “result display” item is merely provided for convenience in order to make it easy to understand what picture each stop result data A1 to D2 corresponds to, and the stop result information is displayed in the stop result table. Is not remembered as

  In setting the stop result, stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type counter C2 is read and set as a stop result to be displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS. In this case, in the distribution table (FIG. 10) for determining the game result distribution destination (the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot result), “0” and “1” of the jackpot type counter C2 are 15R probable. Corresponding to the jackpot result, "2" to "11" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the 7R probability variable jackpot result, "12" to "17" of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponds to the 7R normal jackpot result, the jackpot type “18” and “19” of the counter C2 correspond to the 3R normal jackpot result.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15, the two types of stop result data A1 and A2 associated with “0” and “1” of the jackpot type counter C2 become pictures indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot result, and the jackpot type counter C2 Ten types of stop result data B1 to B10 associated with “2” to “11” are pictures indicating 7R probability variation jackpot results. In addition, the six types of stop result data C1 to C6 associated with “12” to “17” of the jackpot type counter C2 are pictures indicating the 7R normal jackpot result, and “18” and “19” of the jackpot type counter C2 are displayed. The two types of stop result data D1 and D2 associated with is a pattern indicating a 3R normal jackpot result.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process of FIG. 14, in step S407, stop results corresponding to various probability variation jackpot results are set. Specifically, if the distribution result in step S405 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, either stop result data A1 or A2 is set as the stop result, and if it is a 7R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result One of the data B1 to B10 is set as a stop result.

  In the above configuration, the stop result data is stored in the stop result table. However, the stop result data is stored in a storage area different from the stop result table in the ROM 203, and each stop result data is stored in the stop result table. The storage destination (address information) may be stored. In this case, in step S407, address information may be set as a stop result, or stop result data may be read based on the address information and set as a stop result.

  In step S408, the probability variation flag is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The probability variation flag is information for the MPU 202 to specify which probability variation jackpot result is the result of determining whether or not the current game is successful. In step S408, if the distribution result in step S405 is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, a 15R probability variation flag is stored, and if it is a 7R probability variation jackpot result, a 7R probability variation flag is stored.

  In subsequent step S409, a probability change stop result command is set. The probability change hit result command includes information on the stop result set in step S407, that is, information indicating the stop pattern displayed on the result display sections AS and BS when the result is the probability change big hit result. The probability variation stop result command set in step S409 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 grasps the stop pattern displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS based on the received probability change hit result command.

  On the other hand, if the game result assigned in step S405 is not the probability variation jackpot result, a negative determination is made in step S406, and the process proceeds to step S410. In step S410, a process for setting a normal jackpot stop result is executed. In this step, as in step S407, the stop result data corresponding to the big hit type counter C2 is read with reference to the stop result table (FIG. 15) and set as the stop result. Specifically, when the distribution result in step S405 is a 7R normal jackpot result, any of the stop result data C1 to C6 is set as the stop result, and when it is a 3R normal jackpot result, the stop result Either data D1 or D2 is set as a stop result.

  In the subsequent step S411, the normal flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The normal flag is information for the MPU 202 to identify which normal jackpot result is the result of determining whether or not the current game is successful. In step S411, if the distribution result in step S405 is a 7R normal jackpot result, a 7R normal flag is stored, and if it is a 3R normal jackpot result, a 3R normal flag is stored.

  If the lottery result in step S402 or step S403 is not a big win, a negative determination is made in step S404, and the flow proceeds to step S412. In step S412, for the out-of-game time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a losing result, Execute the stop result setting process. As a stop result at the time of disconnection, stop result data of one predetermined picture (for example, a picture that lights only the display segment SG3) is set.

  After executing any of the processes of step S409, step S411, and step S412, in step S413, to set the variation display time of the current game time in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS. Executes the variable display time setting process. In the change display time setting process, the change display time of the game times to be executed this time is set based on the change type counter CS and the like.

  In the following step S414, a change command and a type command are set. The change command includes information on the presence / absence of jackpot, occurrence / non-occurrence of reach, and information on change display time. The type command includes information on the game result (big hit type) (in other words, information on the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32). In other words, the type command includes 15R probability variation jackpot result information, 7R probability variation jackpot result information, 7R normal jackpot result information, 3R ordinary jackpot result information, and the like.

  The variation command and type command set in step S414 are transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect in the game times based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of the effect include the variable display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variable display mode of the symbol is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed.

  After that, in step S415, the main display unit 43 is configured so that the display of the variation of the picture is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. To control. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process of FIG. 13, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 302, that is, when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the process for advancing game times in steps S <b> 306 to S <b> 310 is executed. . In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. The value of the variation display time information is set in the variation start process at the start of the game times. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, display control is performed on the result display section so that the display segments SG1 to SG7 are turned on and off in a predetermined order in the result display section related to the current game round (light emission of each display segment). Control. After execution of step S307, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S308. In the variation end process, in the result display unit in which the variation display of the pattern is started in the variation start process of step S415 of FIG. 14 among the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS, step S407, step S410 or The main display unit 43 is controlled so that the pattern is stopped and displayed according to the stop result set in step S412. When the symbol corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the symbol is not erased even when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the stopped display state is at least when the opening / closing execution mode ends (the next variable display starts). Time).

  In the subsequent step S309, a change end command is set. The variation end command set in step S309 is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 receives the change end command and displays the final stop symbol combination in the game round in a definitive display (final stop display).

  Thereafter, in step S310, a game number counter update process is executed. Specifically, the value of the high-frequency game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is decremented by one. The high frequency game number counter area is for counting the number of game times executed after the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. After the execution of step S310, the game times control process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S204 in the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the game state transition process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the shift of the opening / closing execution mode, the start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S504. In the start process, it is checked that the variable winning device 32 is closed before the opening / closing execution mode is started. If the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode (if the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, this is deleted) If the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode (if the high frequency support flag is stored in the flag storage area 235, it is deleted). Further, in the opening / closing execution mode start process, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 32 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the opening period setting process, opening time information stored in advance in the ROM 203 is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The value of the timer counter T is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle, every time the timer interrupt process is started).

  In the subsequent step S505, the value of the round counter RC is set, and a round number setting process to be executed in the current opening / closing execution mode is performed. In step S505, control is performed so that the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode to be executed this time is displayed on the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43.

  Specifically, if the distribution result of the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, “15” is set in the round counter RC, and if the result is a 7R probability variation jackpot result or a 7R normal jackpot result, the round counter If “7” is set in RC and 3R is a normal jackpot, “3” is set in round counter RC. If the result is a 15R probability variable jackpot result, the total number of round games is 15. If the result is a 7R probability variable jackpot result or a 7R normal jackpot result, the total number of round games is 7. In the case of, the main display unit 43 is controlled so that a display (notification) indicating that the total number of round games is 3 is made on the round display unit RS.

  In step S 505, in order to grasp the jackpot type distribution result, any probability change flag (15R probability change flag, 7R probability change flag) or normal flag (7R normal flag, 3R normal flag) is stored in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. It is done by determining whether it is done.

  In the subsequent step S506, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. The contents of the effect include the display mode in the symbol display device 41, and the determined display mode is output from the effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Based on the display content command received from the effect control device 82, the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that display corresponding to the current open / close execution mode (for example, moving image display) is performed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S503, that is, if there is no transition to the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the variable display, transition processing at the time of departure is executed in step S507. The transition process at the time of losing ends the high frequency support mode when the number of games reaches a specified number (for example, 100 times) in a situation where the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It is a process for making it. Details of this processing will be described later.

  After executing step S506 or step S507, after executing the external signal setting process in step S508, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the jackpot signal output terminal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the jackpot signal output state. Thereby, when the jackpot signal output terminal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the jackpot signal is output to the management control device, and the jackpot is generated in the pachinko machine 10 in the management control device. I can understand what happened.

  On the other hand, when in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S501, and the process proceeds to step S509. In step S509, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. When the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S510. Here, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the big prize opening / closing process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in an open state and the big prize opening 32a is opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32d. If the big prize opening 32a is not opened, it is determined in step S602 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”, and whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S603. Determine.

  When the value of the round counter RC is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the big prize opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S604, and the variable winning drive unit 32d is set to open the variable winning device 32. Drive state.

  In subsequent step S605, a round opening time setting process is executed. In the opening time setting process, “15000” (30 sec) corresponding to the upper limit opening time (upper limit opening time, round game upper limit duration) is input to the timer counter T.

  In the subsequent step S606, an upper limit winning number setting process for each round is performed. In the process of setting the maximum number of winnings in each round, a process of inputting “10” corresponding to the maximum number of winnings to a winning counter PC provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is performed.

  In step S607, an opening command is set, and the opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to each round based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If the variable winning device 32 is in the open state in step S601, the process proceeds to step S608, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. If the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, it is determined in step S609 whether or not a game ball has won the variable winning device 32 based on the detection state of the winning prize winning sensor 32c. If no winning has occurred, the open / close process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1 in step S610, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0” in step S611. If not, the open / close process is terminated.

  If the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S608 and the upper limit release time has elapsed, or if the value of the winning counter PC is “0” and the upper limit winning number has been won in step S611. This means that the round end condition is satisfied. In such a case, in step S612, the variable winning drive unit 32d is set in a non-driven state to close the variable winning device 32.

  In the subsequent step S613, the value of the round counter RC is decremented by 1, and update processing of the round counter RC is executed. In step S614, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.

  If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, in step S615, setting of the closing time from round to round, that is, from the time when the variable prize-winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and again to the open state. Execute the process. In the closing time setting process, “500” (1 sec) corresponding to the waiting time (interval) between rounds is input to the timer counter T.

  Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S616, and the opening / closing process is terminated. The close command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the round game interval based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  If it is determined in step S614 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, an ending start process is executed in step S617. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, a process of inputting “1000” (2 sec) corresponding to the waiting time information for ending to the timer counter T is performed.

  Thereafter, after setting an ending command in step S618, the opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The effect control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 16), after the big prize opening / closing process is executed in step S510, it is determined in step S511 whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is “0”, it is determined by the timer counter T whether or not the ending waiting time has ended in step S512. If the waiting time for ending has not ended, the game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the waiting time for ending has ended, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S513. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, in step S701, it is determined whether the 15R probability change flag or the 7R probability change flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, it means that the result is a probable jackpot result. In this case, in step S702, the flag for deleting the information for specifying the gaming state is deleted. Execute the flag clear process. Specifically, when an opening / closing execution mode flag, a high probability mode flag, and a high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted. Of these flags, those not stored in the various flag storage areas 235 at the time of execution of step S702 are kept unstored.

  In the subsequent step S703, the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and in the step S704, the high frequency support flag is stored in the area 235. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. After performing the process of step S704, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. In the following, a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode may be referred to as a “probability changing gaming state”.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S701 (when neither the 15R probability variation flag nor the 7R probability variation flag is stored), it means that the normal jackpot result is obtained. In this case, in step S705 The flag erasure process is executed. The process in this step is the same as the flag erasing process in step S702.

  In the subsequent step S706, the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a gaming state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. In the following, a gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode may be referred to as a “short-time gaming state”.

  In the subsequent step S707, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The information of the game number counter area set in this step is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the game number is executed in step S310 in the game number control process of FIG. After execution of step S707, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game state transition process of FIG. 16, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S513, the process for ending the display of the round display unit RS is performed in step S514. After the completion processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in S515, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed and various counters and flags used during the opening / closing execution mode are deleted.

  Next, the shift processing at the time of disconnection in step S507 in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the transition process at the time of detachment, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the high probability mode flag is not stored, that is, if the current lottery mode is the low probability mode, is a high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage area 235 in step S802? Determine whether or not.

  If the high-frequency support flag is stored, that is, if the gaming state at that time is the short-time gaming state, the process proceeds to step S803, and whether or not the information in the game number counter area is “0”. judge. As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and “100” is set in the game number counter area accordingly (see steps S706 and S707 in FIG. 18). Further, the information on the number-of-games counter area is updated when one game is completed (see step S310 in FIG. 13). Therefore, the determination process in step S803 determines whether or not 100 game times have been executed after the game state has shifted to the short-time game state.

  If the information in the game number counter area is “0”, the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 is erased in step S804. As a result, the high frequency support mode ends and the support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. That is, the short-time gaming state ends, and the gaming state shifts to a normal gaming state (a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode).

  In the subsequent step S805, a high-frequency support end command is set, and then the shift processing at the time of disconnection is ended. The high-frequency support end command set in this step is transmitted to the effect control device 82 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The high frequency support end command is a command indicating that the short-time gaming state has ended, and the production control device 82 receives the high frequency support end command to recognize that the high frequency support mode has ended.

  In addition, when an affirmative determination is made in step S801 (when the high probability mode flag is stored and the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode), when a negative determination is made in step S802 (a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support flag) Is not stored and is in a normal gaming state), or when a negative determination is made in step S803 (when the information in the number-of-games counter area has not reached “0”), the transition at the time of departure The process ends.

<Electric Configurations of Production Control Device 82 and Display Control Device 212>
Next, the electrical configuration of the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on the effect control board 241 provided in the effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command is received. Also, an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command, an open command, a close command, and an ending command is received. In addition, a probability change stop result command and a high frequency support end command are also received.

  Also, an effect operation unit 75 provided on the front door frame 14 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242, and detection information (detection signal) from the effect operation unit 75 is input. The MPU 242 determines whether or not the effect operation unit 75 is operated based on the detection information.

  As described above, the holding light emitting units 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display light emitting unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Yes.

  The MPU 252 receives, from the effect control device 82, a game time control command (game time control information) for displaying a variation of symbols, and an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode) for displaying a moving image during the open / close execution mode. Information). Then, the received commands are analyzed or predetermined arithmetic processing is performed based on the received commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 255).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 254.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<About various processes executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82>
Next, the effect control process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Such processing is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). It should be noted that illustration and description of the effect control processing that has low relevance to the characteristics of the present embodiment (for example, light emission control of the reserved light emission units 45 to 47) are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the effect control process is roughly divided into a specific state grasping process in step S1001, a game turning effect process in step S1002, and an opening / closing execution mode effect process in step S1003. Yes.

<Understanding process of specific state>
The specific state grasping process in step S1001 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a stop picture (displayed as a stop result on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS) when the jackpot is consecutively played (when a jackpot occurs in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state). (Historical pattern) history is managed by the production control device 82. In the specific state grasping process, when a jackpot occurs, the current gaming state is a specific state (probable change gaming state or This is a process for the effect control device 82 to grasp whether or not the time-short game state.

  In the specific state grasping process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not an ending command (see step S618 in FIG. 17) is received from the main control device 81. When the ending command is received from the main control device 81, the command is stored in the command storage area 248 of the RAM 244 in the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82. Therefore, the process in step S1101 is performed by determining whether or not an ending command is stored in the command storage area 248.

  As a result of the above determination, if an ending command is received, it means that a jackpot has occurred and the corresponding open / close execution mode has ended. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The specific state flag is a flag indicating that the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

  If the specific state flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 247 as a result of the determination, the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage area 247 in step S1103. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 82, it recognizes that the gaming state shifted to the probability variation gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

  After execution of step S1103, or when a negative determination is made in step S1101 (when the ending command is not received and the end of the opening / closing execution mode is not grasped), in step S1104, various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 are stored. It is determined whether or not a specific state flag is stored. Thus, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the specific state flag is stored, or if it is determined in step S1102 that the specific state flag is stored, in step S1105, the high frequency support end command is sent from the main controller 81. (See step S805 in FIG. 19) is determined. Specifically, the command storage area 248 of the RAM 244 is referred to and it is determined whether or not the high frequency support end command is stored in the area.

  If the high frequency support end command has been received, this means that the high frequency support mode has ended. In this case, the specific state stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 in step S1106. Clear the flag. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 82, it recognizes that the probability change game state or the time-saving game state was complete | finished. In the subsequent step S1107, the history information of the stop pattern stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 is deleted. The history information of the stop pattern is a history of a stop pattern (a pattern displayed as a stop result on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS) when a big hit occurs in the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state. Is shown. The process of storing the stop pattern history information in the stop pattern history storage area 250 will be described later.

  After the execution of step S1107, when a negative determination is made at step S1104 (when the specific state flag is not stored and the probability variation gaming state or the short time gaming state is not present), or when a negative determination is made at step S1105 (high frequency support end) If the command has not been received), the specific state grasping process is terminated.

<Game processing effect processing>
Next, the effect processing for game times in step S1002 (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The game times effect process is to determine an effect to be executed in the game times, but in the present embodiment, the history information storage process is further performed in the effect determination process. In the history information storage process, history information of a stop pattern (a pattern displayed as a stop result on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS) when a probability variation jackpot has occurred is stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 of the RAM 244. Is stored in the process.

  In the game turn effect process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command from the main control device 81 are received. If these commands have been received, a variable command handling process is executed in step S1202.

  In the variation command handling process, based on the contents of the variation command and the type command, the result of the lottery game that is started this time (whether or not it is a big win) and the type (big hit type) if the big win The distribution result). And based on the grasping result, the process of determining the symbol (see FIG. 7) to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is executed. That is, when the game result of the game times started this time is a 15R probability variation jackpot result (when the stop pattern of stop result data A1, A2 is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43), the symbol for 15R probability variation jackpot When the 3R normal jackpot result is obtained (when the stop pattern of the stop result data D1, D2 is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43), the 3R normal jackpot symbol determining process is performed. Further, when the 7R probability variation jackpot result or the 7R normal jackpot result (when the stop symbols of the stop result data B1 to B10 and C1 to C6 are stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43), the symbol determination process for 7R jackpot If the result is a removal result, a symbol determination process for removal is executed.

  When the symbol determination process for 15R probability variation big hit is executed, the combination of the same specific symbol (the symbol with the numeral “7” (FIG. 7 (g))) is established on one effective line L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result to be determined is determined as information on the current stop result. When the symbol determination process for 3R normal jackpot is executed, the combination of the same non-specific symbol (the symbol with the numeral “4” (FIG. 7D)) on one effective line L1 to L5 is Information corresponding to the established stop result is determined as the current stop result. When the 7R jackpot symbol determination process is executed, the same chance symbol (“1” to “3”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”) is placed on one effective line L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols with any number is established is determined as the current stop result.

  In each of the symbol determination processes described above, on which of the effective lines L1 to L5 the same symbol combination is established, or in the symbol determination process for 7R jackpot, which of the multiple types of chance symbols is stopped Whether or not to be decided at random by lottery or the like.

  When executing the symbol determination process for losing, it is determined whether or not the game times are related to outlier reach display based on the contents of the change command. The information corresponding to the stop result (for example, “1 · 4 · 1”) in which the combination of the reach reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the game times are not related to the occurrence of the outreach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the stop result that the combination of outreach symbols is not stopped and displayed. The information corresponding to is determined as information on the current stop result.

  Further, in the variable command handling process, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the various table storage areas 245 of the ROM 243, the effect continuation time (effect continuation period) corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time is selected. At the same time, the contents of the production are selected. The MPU 242 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 63 and the output control of the speaker unit 64 in the current game time in accordance with the determined effect pattern. Then, a stop result command and a pattern command corresponding to each processing result are transmitted to the display control device 212.

  Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 reads from the program ROM 253 a data table for performing an effect for the current game turn on the symbol display device 41, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 255 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 41, the effect for the game turn is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82, and the stop result determined by the MPU 242 is finally stopped and displayed. The

  By the way, the various stop symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 (first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) are identified for the player as compared with the various symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41. It has become difficult. In addition, the main display unit 43 has a smaller display area than the symbol display device 41 and is less noticeable. For this reason, it is assumed that many players determine whether or not the jackpot has occurred or determine the jackpot type by looking at the symbols that are stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  Under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R probability variable jackpot result, the combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, and the jackpot type Is distributed to the 3R normal jackpot result, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. For this reason, when the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the 3R jackpot result, the player can grasp the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode and the presence or absence of probability variation by looking at the symbols on the display screen G. it can.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is assigned to the 7R probability variable jackpot result or the 7R normal jackpot result, the same chance symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In this case, although it can be understood from the chance symbol that the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is seven, the chance symbol is stopped and displayed for both probability change and non-probability change. It will be. Therefore, even if the player sees the symbol stopped and displayed on the display screen G, it is impossible or difficult to grasp the presence or absence of the probability change.

  It should be noted that, in the probability variation gaming state, the rendering mode during the game is set to a first mode different from the rendering mode in the normal gaming state so that the player can recognize from the rendering side that the game is in the probability variation gaming state. For example, the background color on the display screen G is changed to a dedicated color different from the background color in the normal gaming state, or the display light emitting unit 63 or the electric decoration unit (not shown) installed on the game board 24 is defined as the normal gaming state. It is conceivable to emit light with a different light emission pattern or light emission color, or to make an effect sound (sound effect) output from the speaker unit 64 different from the normal game state.

  In addition, in the short-time gaming state, the effect mode during the game turn is set to a second mode different from the normal game state and the probabilistic game state effect mode so that the player can recognize that it is in the short-time game state. . For example, the background color on the display screen G is changed to a dedicated color different from the background color of the normal game state and the probability change game state, or the display light emitting unit 63 and the illumination part (not shown) on the game board 24 are dedicated light emission. A configuration in which light is emitted with a pattern or emission color, or a production sound during game play output from the speaker unit 64 is used as a dedicated output sound is conceivable.

  After executing the process of step S1202, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a probability variation hit result command (see step S409 in FIG. 14) has been received from the main controller 81. If the stoppage command for probability variation is received, the process proceeds to step S1204, and processing for grasping the stop result of the result display sections AS and BS is executed based on the received suspension result command for probability variation. That is, the type of pattern for probability variation big hit that is stopped and displayed on the result display sections AS and BS in the current game round is grasped. Specifically, in the display control of the main display unit 43 by the main control device 81, it is grasped which of the stop result data A1, A2, B1 to B10 in FIG. 15 is used as the stop result.

  In subsequent step S1205, the stop result information obtained in step S1204 is stored in the stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244. The information on the stop result is stored and accumulated in the stop picture history storage area 250 each time a stop result command for probability variation is transmitted from the main control device 81. The MPU 242 manages the accumulated stop result information as history information indicating the history of the stop pattern for probability variation big hits. Note that all the history information stored (accumulated) in the stop picture history storage area 250 is erased (cleared) by executing the process of step S1107 of FIG. 22 when the short-time gaming state is completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201 or step S1203 after execution of step S1205, the game turn effect process is terminated.

<Direction processing for opening / closing execution mode>
Next, the opening / closing execution mode effect processing in step S1003 (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is a 7R probability variation jackpot result or a 7R normal jackpot result, the presence / absence of probability variation is not notified in the game times, and the opening / closing execution mode is executed in accordance with the jackpot result. In this configuration, the presence or absence of a certain change is reported. The post-notification effect that notifies the presence / absence of the probability change after shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is performed by displaying a predetermined image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and is based on the command transmitted from the main control device 81. This is performed by executing various controls in the effect control device 82 and the display control device 212.

  The opening / closing execution mode effect process shown in FIG. 24 determines the aspect of the post-notification effect. When the jackpot type is assigned to the 15R probability variation jackpot result or the 3R normal jackpot result, the presence or absence of probability variation can be identified from the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41. Then, the post-notification effect corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result and the post-notification effect corresponding to the 3R normal jackpot result are respectively performed. Therefore, those processes will also be described together.

  In the effect process for the opening / closing execution mode, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not an opening command (see step S506 in FIG. 16) is received from the main control device 81. If the opening command has not been received, the effect determination process ends.

  On the other hand, when the opening command is received, that is, when it is the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode, based on the type command from the main control device 81, the opening / closing execution mode is triggered in step S1302. It is determined whether the jackpot type is a 3R normal jackpot result. When the jackpot type is the 3R normal jackpot result, the first notification effect A is set as a subsequent notification effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in step S1303.

  Here, the first notification effect A will be described with reference to FIG. The first notification effect A notifies the player that the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot).

  In the first notification effect A, as shown in FIG. 25A, an image in which a girl character 401 and a tree fairy character 402 appear is displayed. Specifically, the girl character 401 and the fairy character 402 repeatedly approach and separate, and a moving image is displayed in which both are playing. As a result, the opening / closing execution mode (because of the jackpot) is celebrated and the game is excited, and at the same time, the type of jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the normal jackpot result (end of the opening / closing execution mode) That the subsequent lottery mode becomes the low probability mode). That is, among the girl character 401 and the fairy character 402, the girl character 401 is a character corresponding to the normal jackpot result, and the normal jackpot result is clearly indicated or suggested by the display of the character. The first notification effect A is continuously displayed from the first round to the last round.

  When the first notification effect A is set as the post notification effect as described above, the effect control device 82 outputs an effect pattern command to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, based on the effect pattern command received from the effect control device 82, a data table for performing the first notification effect A on the symbol display device 41 is read from the program ROM 253 and output to the drawing list for the VDP 255. To do. Accordingly, the first notification effect A is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 over the first to third round games in the current opening / closing execution mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, a round number display 403 is displayed at the upper left of the display screen G. Specifically, “1R” is displayed as indicating the currently executed round.

  In addition, when the first notification effect A is set in the effect control device 82, an ending effect pattern command is sent to the display control device 212 so that the time-shortening ending effect is executed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. Send. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the time-saving ending effect is displayed on the display screen G during the ending period based on the ending effect pattern command received from the effect control device 82. In the time-saving ending effect, an image for notifying the transition to the time-saving gaming state is displayed after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, and for example, a character display such as “Chance! 100 time reductions” as shown in FIG. 404 or the like is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing execution mode effect process (FIG. 24), if a negative determination is made in step S1302, that is, if the jackpot type that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is not 3R normal jackpot, step S1304 is performed. Then, based on the type command from the main controller 81, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot result. If the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot result, the second notification effect B is set as a subsequent notification effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in step S1305.

  Here, the second notification effect B will be described with reference to FIG. The second notification effect B is to notify the player that the current jackpot is a promising jackpot.

  In the second notification effect B, in the first round game in the opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 26A, an image in which the wizard character 405 and the tree fairy character 402 appear is displayed. In detail, the magic character 405 is displayed with a smile, and a video image in which the fairy character 402 jumps up and down next to it is displayed. This will congratulate the opening / closing execution mode (because it was a big hit), and at the same time, the type of jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the probability change jackpot result (end of the opening / closing execution mode) That the subsequent lottery mode becomes the high probability mode). That is, the wizard character 405 is a character corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result, and the probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated or suggested by the display of the character.

  Also, in the second notification effect B, in the second and subsequent round games, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), for example, instead of the fairy character 402, it is clearly shown that the probability variation jackpot result such as “Congratulations on probability variation” is given. The character display 406 to be displayed is displayed. Thereby, the player can clearly know that the current jackpot is a probable change jackpot result, that is, the transition to the probability change gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the second notification effect B is set as the post-notification effect as described above, the effect control device 82 transmits an effect pattern command to that effect to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the second notification effect B is displayed on the display screen G based on the effect pattern command received from the effect control device 82.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing execution mode effect process (FIG. 24), if a negative determination is made in step S1304, that is, the jackpot type that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is neither a 3R normal jackpot nor a 15R probability variable jackpot. In this case, in step S1306, based on the type command from the main controller 81, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 7R normal jackpot result. When the jackpot type is the 7R normal jackpot result, the third notification effect C1 is set as a subsequent notification effect performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in step S1307.

  Here, the third notification effect C1 will be described with reference to FIG. The third notification effect C1 notifies the player that the current jackpot is a normal jackpot (non-probable change jackpot).

  As already described, when the jackpot type is 7R normal jackpot, in the game times, when the jackpot is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the same chance as in the case of 7R probability variable jackpot Combinations of symbols (designs with numbers “1” to “3”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “9”) are used, and it is not specified whether or not the result is a probabilistic jackpot result. . In other words, the player sees the post-notification effect in the opening / closing execution mode in a situation where it is unclear whether the result is a probable jackpot result, and has a stronger interest than when the 3R normal jackpot result or the 15R jackpot result. It is assumed that the post-notification production will be seen. Therefore, as with the first notification effect A, although it is a notification of a normal jackpot result that is disappointing to the player, the third notification effect C1 allows the game to be excited and the player to enjoy the later notification effect. The first notification effect A is different from the first notification effect A.

  In the third notification effect C1, the girl character 401 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in the first and second round games in the opening / closing execution mode. Then, in the third round game, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the girl character 401 is going to change to the wizard character 405 and if it succeeds in changing, it will be in the probable game state. To do. Specifically, a character display 407 of “Confirmed when transformed into a witch” is displayed, and the girl character 401 is lit up with the spell while holding the wand while casting a spell for the girl character 401 to transform. A frame is displayed.

  In the subsequent round game of the fourth round, as shown in FIG. 27B, an image in which light wraps not only the girl character 401 but also the entire display screen G is displayed. Note that the video represents the state of the transformation, and the display of the video gives the player the impression that transformation is progressing (toward the success of transformation), and the transformation to the wizard character 405 is performed. The expectation that it will be achieved, that is, that the transition to the probable gaming state will be notified.

  Thereafter, in the fifth round game, a button operation image 408 having an image imitating the effect operation unit 75 and a character display of “Press the button!” Is displayed, and the effect operation unit 75 is displayed to the player. Prompt for operation. When the effect operation unit 75 is operated within the predetermined operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the effect operation unit 75 being operated, FIG. As shown in the figure, a result video (result video) in which the girl character 401 in which the light has settled and failed to transform appears is displayed. This clearly or suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the normal jackpot result, that is, the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends does not become the probability variation gaming state.

  When the third notification effect C1 is set as the subsequent notification effect as described above, the effect control device 82 transmits an effect pattern command with the content to that effect to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the third notification effect C1 is displayed on the display screen G based on the effect pattern command received from the effect control device 82.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing execution mode effect process (FIG. 24), if a negative determination is made in step S1306, that is, the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is 3R normal jackpot, 15R probability jackpot, 7R normal jackpot If neither of these is true, it means that the jackpot type is a 7R probability variation jackpot result. In this case, in step S1308, 7R probability variation effect determination processing is executed. Here, the 7R probability changing effect determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the 7R probability changing effect determination process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not a specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The specific state flag means that the current gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state or a short-time gaming state, and whether or not the current gaming state is a probability-changing gaming state or a time-shorting gaming state by the process of step S1401. Determine.

  If the specific state flag is stored as a result of the determination, in step S1402, the first result display section AS or the second in the current game time (the game time executed immediately before the opening / closing execution mode). The pattern stopped and displayed on the result display unit BS is grasped. The stop pattern grasping process refers to the stop pattern history information stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 of the RAM 244, or the probability variation hit stop result command transmitted from the main control device 81 (step S409 in FIG. 14). Refer to).

  In subsequent step S1403, the stop picture history information stored in the stop picture history storage area 250 is referred to, and the stop picture stopped and displayed in the game times before the current game time is grasped. Note that the stop pattern history information stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is erased when the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state ends (see step S1107 in FIG. 22). In this case, the stop picture before this time will be grasped for the consecutive jackpot period.

  In the subsequent step S1404, the current stop picture grasped in step S1402 is compared with the stop picture before this time grasped in step S1403, and the stop picture before this time is the same as the current stop picture. It is determined whether or not there is a stop picture. That is, it is determined whether or not the same stop picture as the current stop picture has already been displayed during the jackpot consecutive period.

  If the same stop pattern does not exist or if a negative determination is made in step S1401 (if no specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244), the process proceeds to step S1405, and the lottery process for the revival effect is performed. Execute. In step S 1405, the lottery process is performed using the effect table stored in the table storage area 245 of the ROM 243 and the value of the effect counter stored in the various counter areas 249 of the RAM 244.

  In the subsequent step S1406, it is determined whether or not the revival effect has been won as a result of the lottery process in step S1405. If the revival effect has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the fourth notification effect C2 is set as the subsequent notification effect.

  Here, the fourth notification effect C2 will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth notification effect C2 notifies that the current jackpot is a promising jackpot, and has a paired relationship with the third notification effect C1 (FIG. 27).

  In the fourth notification effect C2, as shown in FIGS. 29A to 29C, the same display as in the case of the third notification effect C1 is displayed in the flow from the first round to the fifth round button operation image 408. Do. Specifically, after the girl character 401 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in the first and second round games, as shown in FIG. 29 (a) in the third round game. In addition, it is taught that the girl character 401 is going to be transformed into the wizard character 405 and that if the transformation is successful, the probable gaming state is set. Then, in the fourth round game, an image representing the state of transformation is displayed (FIG. 29B), and in the fifth round game, a button operation image 408 that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 75 is displayed. It is displayed (FIG. 29 (c)).

  When the effect operation unit 75 is operated within the predetermined operation effective period, or when the operation effective period elapses without the effect operation unit 75 being operated, FIG. As shown, a result video (an end video) in which the magical character 405 in which the light has settled and the transformation was successful appears. Further, in order to congratulate that it is a probable big hit, for example, a character display 409 of “Congratulations on Probability!” Is also performed. This clearly or suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result, that is, the gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the probability variation gaming state.

  When the fourth notification effect C2 is set as the subsequent notification effect as described above, the effect control device 82 transmits an effect pattern command with the content to that effect to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the fourth notification effect C2 is displayed on the display screen G based on the effect pattern command received from the effect control device 82.

  Returning to the description of the 7R probability changing effect determination process in FIG. 28, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1406 (if the revival effect is won), in step S1408, the fifth notification effect C3 is set as the subsequent notification effect. After that, the 7R probability changing effect determination process is terminated.

  Here, the fifth notification effect C3 will be described with reference to FIG. The fifth notification effect C3 is for notifying that the current jackpot is a normal jackpot and then notifying that it is a promising jackpot.

  In addition, since the flow to the button operation image 408 in the first to fifth rounds in the fifth notification effect C3 is the same as that in the fourth notification effect C2, the description thereof is omitted. After the button operation image 408 is displayed in the fifth notification effect C3, if the effect operation unit 75 is operated within a predetermined operation effective period, or the effect operation unit 75 is not operated, the operation is effective. When the period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), an image is displayed in which the girl character 401 that has failed to transform as the light stops. This video is the same as the result video of the third notification effect C1 (FIG. 27 (d)), so that the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the normal jackpot result. Notify as follows.

  In the fifth notification effect C3, as the sixth round game is started, an image in which the wizard character 405 appears is displayed as shown in FIG. This clearly or suggests that the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result, that is, the gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the probability variation gaming state.

  In this case, since the notification is made as if it is non-probable, the player assumes that the player is non-probable before the display of FIG. It is assumed that you are in a state of giving up. Therefore, the result video of the fifth notification effect C3 (video in FIG. 30B) is, for example, a flashy background video or the magic character 405 of the result video of the fourth notification effect C2 (FIG. 29D). By increasing the display size, the impact is stronger than the result video of the fourth notification effect C2. Thereby, the player is surprised more strongly, and the joy and fun when the transition to the probability changing gaming state is notified is increased.

  Returning to the description of the 7R probability changing effect determination process in FIG. 28, when an affirmative determination is made in step S <b> 1404, that is, the current stop pattern grasped in step S <b> 1402 is a stop picture before the present grasped in step S <b> 1403. If it is included, the process proceeds to step S1409, and the second notification effect B is set as the subsequent notification effect. As already described, in the second notification effect B, the image of the girl character 401 trying to transform into the witch character 405, that is, whether it is a probable big hit or a normal big hit is not performed, and opening / closing is executed. From the beginning of the mode, a wizard character 405 appears and promptly notifies the probability change (see FIG. 26). After step S1409 is executed, the 7R probability variation effect determination process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the opening / closing execution mode effect process (FIG. 24), after executing the process of step S1303, step S1305, step S1307, or step S1308, in step S1309, the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 are post-notification effects. Set the flag. The post notification effect flag indicates the type of the determined effect in addition to the fact that the post notification effect has been determined. In step S1309, if the first notification effect A is determined as the later notification effect, the later notification effect flag A is determined. If the second notification effect B is determined, the subsequent notification effect flag B is determined. When C1 is determined, the post-notification effect flag C1 is set. When the fourth notification effect C2 is determined, the post-notification effect flag C2 is set. When the fifth notification effect C3 is determined, the post-notification effect flag C1 is set. Each production C3 is stored. The post notification effect flag stored in this step is cleared (erased) at the end of the post notification effect or at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. After execution of step S1309, the opening / closing execution mode effect process is terminated.

<About the game flow>
Next, the flow of the game will be described.

<Regarding the flow of storing and deleting stop pictures>
First, the flow of storing and erasing stop pictures will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. Here, it is assumed that 5 jackpots are consecutive, and the breakdown is as follows: 1st and 2nd are 7R probability variation jackpot results, 3rd is a 7R regular jackpot result, and 4th is a 7R probability variation jackpot result. Suppose the 5th is a 3R normal jackpot result. In FIG. 31, the numbers in square brackets indicate the order of jackpots in the villa.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the jackpot is won in the winning lottery by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at the timing t1, and the jackpot type becomes a 7R probability variable jackpot result, the start of fluctuation of the game number for notifying the jackpot At timing, the main control device 81 transmits a probability variation stop result command to the effect control device 82 (step S409 in FIG. 14). Based on this, in the production control device 82, as shown in FIG. 31 (f), information on the stop pattern that is stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS (for example, information on stop result data B5). ) Is stored in the stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 (step S1205 in FIG. 23).

  Then, at the timing t2, when the game round started from the timing t1 is completed, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 7R probability variation big hit result is started under the control of the main controller 81. Thereafter, at timing t3 which is the ending start timing of the opening / closing execution mode, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82 (step S618 in FIG. 17). As a result, as shown in FIG. 31E, in the effect control device 82, the specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 (step S1103 in FIG. 22).

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends at timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 31B to 31D, a transition process to the probability change gaming state based on the 7R probability change big hit result is performed under the control of the main controller 81. After that, when the second jackpot that is the result of the 7R probability variation jackpot occurs at the timing t5 during the transition to the probability variation gaming state, the main control device 81 stops the probability variation winning strike from the main control device 81 as in the case of the timing t1. A result command is sent. Based on this, the stop control information (for example, information of stop result data B3) that is stopped and displayed in the game times is stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 (step (f) in FIG. 31).

  Then, at the timing t6, when the game round started from the timing t5 is completed, the opening / closing execution mode is started under the control of the main controller 81. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 31B to 31D, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are turned off, but the specific state flag is kept on (FIG. 31E).

  Thereafter, with the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state shifts again to the probability-changing gaming state (timing t7), and at timing t8 during the transition to the gaming state, this time the third jackpot, which is the result of the 7R normal jackpot When this occurs, in this case, since it is usually a jackpot result, the probability change hit result command is not transmitted from the main control device 81. Therefore, unlike the case of timings t1 and t5, the stop pattern history storage area 250 does not store stop pattern information (FIG. 31 (f)).

  When the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the third jackpot is completed at the timing t9, a transition process to the short-time gaming state based on the 7R normal jackpot result is performed (FIGS. 31B to 31D). Then, at the timing t10 during the transition to the short-time gaming state, when the fourth jackpot that is the result of the 7R probability variation jackpot occurs, the main controller 81 changes to the effect controller 82 as in the case of the timings t1 and t5. The winning stop result command is transmitted, and stop pattern information (for example, information of stop result data B5) is stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 (FIG. 31 (f)).

  Thereafter, when the fifth jackpot, which is the 3R normal jackpot result, is generated at timing t11 during the transition to the probability variable gaming state, this is a normal jackpot result. The command is not sent. Therefore, as in the case of the timing t8, the stop pattern history storage area 250 does not store stop pattern information (FIG. 31 (f)).

  When the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the fifth jackpot is completed at timing t12, a transition process to the short-time gaming state based on the 3R normal jackpot result is performed (FIGS. 31B to 31D). Thereafter, when 100 game times are executed after the transition to the short-time game state without occurrence of the next jackpot (timing t13), the transition process to the normal game state is controlled under the control of the main controller 81. Is done. Accordingly, a high frequency support end command is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82 (step S805 in FIG. 19). Based on this, in the production control device 82, the information (history information) of the stop pattern stored (accumulated) in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is deleted.

  According to the flow as described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is consecutive, the history of the stop pattern when the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot result is stored. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the history of the stop pattern for probability variation jackpots in the ream. Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the same stop pattern has been stopped and displayed before that when a probable jackpot occurs in the process of jackpots Become.

<Flow of selection process for post-notification production>
Next, the flow of selection processing for the post notification effect performed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described. In the present embodiment, a post-notification production selection process when a probability variation jackpot (specifically, a 7R probability variation jackpot) occurs is characteristic. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 31, in the case shown in FIG. 31, the first big hit (big hit that occurred at timing t1) and the second big hit (big hit that occurred at timing t5) and 4 The flow of the selection process of the post notification effect will be described for the second jackpot (the jackpot generated at timing t10). FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the selection process of the post notification effect.

  The first jackpot is the so-called first hit, and there is no jackpot before that in the jackpot period. In this case, in accordance with the result of the lottery process for the revival effect in step S1406 in FIG. 28, the fourth notification effect C2 (FIG. 29) in which the transformation to the wizard character 405 is successful, and after the transformation has failed once, the transformation is revitalized. One of the fifth notification effects C3 (FIG. 30) that succeeds is selected as the subsequent notification effect. It is assumed that the stop picture selected at the time of the first big hit is the stop picture of the stop result data B5 as shown in FIG.

  The second jackpot occurs during the transition to the probabilistic gaming state (see FIG. 31), and is a so-called Renso jackpot. In this case, the stop pattern that is stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the game round when the big hit occurs is grasped. Then, referring to the past stop patterns stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250, it is determined whether or not the same stop pattern as the grasped pattern has been stopped and displayed.

  Since the stop pattern stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is a stop pattern that is a promising big hit after the big hit that triggers the reaming villa, the first stoppage of the big hit in the stop pattern history storage area 250 Only the picture is memorized. Then, as shown in FIG. 32, the second jackpot stop picture is the stop picture of the stop result data B3, whereas the first jackpot stop picture is the stop picture of the stop result data B5. The stop picture of is not displayed in the past. In this case, as in the case of the first jackpot, the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is selected as the subsequent notification effect.

  The fourth jackpot occurs during the transition to the short-time gaming state (see FIG. 31), and it is a consecutive jackpot like the second jackpot. And the stop picture at the time of the fourth big hit is the stop picture of the stop result data B5, and is the same pattern as the stop picture at the time of the first big hit. That is, the stop picture at the time of the fourth big hit is already stopped and displayed in the consecutive resort period.

  For example, if the player visually recognizes a stop picture (stop picture of stop result data B5) that is stopped and displayed at the game time corresponding to the jackpot when the first jackpot occurs, the opening / closing corresponding to the jackpot is executed. By seeing the post notification effect (the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3) performed in the mode, the player knows that the visually recognized stop pattern corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. it can. In particular, the jackpot stop picture that is stopped and displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS is not erased even when the game is completed, and continues to be displayed during the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode. It is assumed that the above confirmation can be performed relatively easily.

  When the player hits the stop picture (stop picture of the stop result data B5) that is stopped and displayed again on the result display parts AS and BS when the fourth jackpot occurs, the display content is the first time. Since it is the same as that at the time of jackpot, it is possible to grasp that the result is a probable jackpot result before the post-notification effect is executed. In such a player, as a result of lower interest in the post-notification effect, it is difficult to arouse a sense of sensation and happiness due to the resurrection effect of the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3. There is a risk.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined that the player has a probable jackpot result, as in the case where the same stop picture as the stop pattern for the current probable jackpot result is already stopped and displayed in the jackpot series. If the situation is known, the second notification effect B is selected without selecting the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 as the subsequent notification effect. Thereby, the probability change jackpot result is notified to the player early and simply, and it is suppressed that the post notification effect becomes troublesome.

  In the above case, since the player knows in advance that the result is a probable jackpot result, it may be possible not to perform the post notification effect itself including the second notification effect B. However, since the result display parts AS and BS are less conspicuous because the display area is smaller than that of the symbol display device 41, there are many players who do not see the stop picture displayed on the result display parts AS and BS. It is also assumed. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the post-notification effect itself is performed, it is possible to clearly know that it is a probable big hit result even if the stop pattern is not seen. Thereby, it can be set as the structure which does not produce a problem also for the player who is not visually recognizing a stop picture.

  In addition, even for a player who is watching a stop pattern, the determination of the probable jackpot result based on the stop pattern is only self-judgment, so it is possible to obtain a sense of security by viewing the suggestive effect (notification) of the probable jackpot result. There is. That is, it is considered that the post-notification production itself has a certain significance even for a player who knows in advance the probable change jackpot result from the stop picture. Under such circumstances, the second notification effect B is performed instead of the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3, so that the probable big hit result is notified early, and a sense of security is quickly obtained. Be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3 are obtained when the same stop pattern as the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result is already stopped and displayed in the jackpot series. However, the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3 may be less likely to be executed as compared to the case where the same stop picture is not stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the same stop pattern is not stopped and displayed, the post-notification effect is selected from the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3, while the same stop pattern is stopped and displayed. If there is, the post notification effect is selected from the second notification effect B, the fourth notification effect C2, and the fifth notification effect C3. In this case, the selection probability of the second notification effect B may be higher than the selection probability of the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3, and the second notification effect B may be easily executed.

  In the above configuration, if the current stop picture is the same as the stop picture for probability change displayed in the past, it is configured to suggest the probability change jackpot result more simply and earlier than the other cases. If the stop pattern is the same as the stop pattern for non-probability displayed in the past (usually the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot result), the configuration suggests the non-probable jackpot result more simply and earlier than if not Also good. Specifically, the first notification effect A may be executed instead of the third notification effect C1.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  If you have assigned a probable jackpot result in the past and the same stop picture is displayed again as the stop picture at that time, depending on the player, the stop this time before the post notification effect (suggest effect) It is conceivable that it is determined that the winning jackpot is based on the contrast between the picture and the past stop picture. In such a case, it is not preferable that an effect having the same contents as the suggestive effect is repeated in order to suppress tiredness of the game effect and a reduction in attention. In this regard, in this configuration, the history of the stop pattern displayed on the result display units AS and BS is stored, and the effect mode of the post notification effect is determined based on the history and the current stop pattern. ing. That is, since the mode of the post-notification effect is changed based on the result of the stop picture, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect having the same contents from being repeated in a situation where the probability variation gaming state can be determined before the suggestion effect is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress satiety of production and a reduction in attention.

  When the stop picture this time is the same as the stop picture for probability change displayed in the past, the probability change is suggested earlier than when it is not. Thereby, the suggestion timing of the probability variation jackpot result can be varied according to the relationship between the past result of the stop pattern and the current stop pattern. In other words, if the player can determine the probable jackpot result before the execution of the post-notification effect, the player can complete the suggestion earlier than otherwise, and the player who already knows the result may feel the post-notification effect bothersome. Can be suppressed. In addition, by making the suggestion early, it is possible to create a free time for the production. For example, a special production (production different from each of the notification productions A, B, and C1 to C3) is performed by using the free time. In such a case, it is possible to expect an effect of increasing the production attention degree.

  In the case where the jackpot hits consecutively, the history of the stop pattern when the jackpot type is a probable jackpot result is stored. In this case, since the history of the stop pattern to be stored is limited to that for a certain period (a certain range), for example, the previous stop pattern or the previous game that is difficult for the player to realistically remember. It is suppressed that the production is changed due to the influence of the stop picture selected when the player plays. In addition, each time a jackpot result is obtained, the usage amount in the RAM 244 (stopped picture history storage area 250) can be saved and the processing load of the storage process can be reduced as compared with the case where the history is stored every time.

  In addition, during jackpot recreational villas (during transition to a probabilistic gaming state or a short-time gaming state), the period until the jackpot is likely to be shortened, the player remembers the stoppage pattern for the jackpot displayed in the past. It becomes easy. As a result, it is possible to perform effect switching for the transition of the stop pattern within the range that the player can keep in memory (what type of stop pattern has been displayed so far). Moreover, it is considered that the player is in an advantageous state for the player during the transition to the probability-changing gaming state or the short-time gaming state, and it is difficult for the player to quit the game and change of the player is difficult to occur while in this state. For this reason, by adopting this configuration, it is possible to make a configuration in which the production changes according to the history status of the stop pattern in the same player (one player), and the production changes depending on the game result of the previous player. Or the influence of the game result on the mode of selecting an effect when the next player is a player is suppressed.

  When the history storage process is terminated, the history stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is deleted. In this case, only the history in the target period exists in the stop picture history storage area 250. For example, in the configuration in which the history remains, processing for managing when each history is necessary (for example, storing the date and time of the history) is required. According to this configuration, such processing is performed. Is no longer necessary. For this reason, it is possible to manage the history with a simple configuration and reduce the processing load of history management. In addition, since the history that has become unnecessary is sequentially deleted, it is possible to contribute to the saving of the usage amount in the stop picture history storage area 250.

  When it is a 7R probability variation jackpot result, the history of the stopped pattern stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is referred to (obtained), and the number of rounds is another number of times (15R probability variation jackpot result, 3R jackpot result) In this case, the history is not referred to. In this case, since the history reference and suggestion effect switching are performed only in the case of some jackpots, the control load required for those processes should be reduced compared to the case of history reference etc. for all jackpots Is possible.

  Moreover, this Embodiment can also be regarded as the structure which changes an effect based on the log | history condition of a stop picture, and can anticipate the following effect by such a structure. According to the present embodiment, the history stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is such that the stop pattern for probability change displayed in the past includes the same stop pattern as the current stop pattern. If it is a predetermined situation, a post-notification effect (second notification effect B) of the first effect mode is executed, and if not in such a situation, after a second effect mode different from the first effect mode. A notification effect (fourth notification effect C2 or fifth notification effect C3) is executed. With such a configuration, the stop picture selection history functions as one of the elements that change the production, and the stop picture that the player has assigned in the previous game is reflected in the selection result of the production. Will be. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the enjoyment of what kind of stop picture is displayed while diversifying the production selection. In addition, the result display portions AS and BS on which the stop pattern is displayed are formed smaller than the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and are hardly noticeable from the player. By adopting such an inconspicuous display history, a player who wants to enjoy the production without knowing the stop picture displayed on the result display parts AS and BS does not easily see the stop picture. And can be configured with consideration for such a player.

  In this case, the present embodiment is configured such that the winning lottery is not performed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, and a new stop picture is not stopped and displayed. For example, if the winning / losing lottery is performed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and a new stop pattern is stopped and displayed, the history may be updated / changed. In order to avoid watching and changing the history, it is necessary to play the opening / closing execution mode while avoiding winning to the operation ports 33 and 34, and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the opening / closing execution mode. In this regard, in this configuration, a new history of the stop pattern does not occur during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode (the history is not updated or changed), so the player can enter the opening / closing execution mode without worrying about the history change. It becomes possible to play.

<Variation 1 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, the aspect of the post-notification effect that is executed when the same stop picture as the stop picture that has already been stopped and displayed during the jackpot is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing 7R probability variation effect determination processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present modification. The process of step S1601 shown in FIG. 33 is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1404 of FIG. 28, and is executed instead of step S1409 of FIG.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, that is, if the current stop picture grasped in step S1402 is included in the stop pictures before this time grasped in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1601. A fourth notification effect C2 (FIG. 29) is set as the notification effect.

  In the case of notifying whether or not the result is a probable jackpot result by the post-notification effect, not only the case where the probable jackpot result is obediently suggested as in the fourth notification effect C2, but also as in the fifth notification effect C3. In addition, there are cases in which a probabilistic jackpot result is suggested after suggesting a normal jackpot result, and the production is diversified. In particular, in the fifth notification effect C3, since the true result is suggested after pretending to be the opposite result, the player can be surprised and the subsequent notification effect can be raised. However, if the player can determine that the outcome is a probable jackpot result before the execution of the post-notification effect, the appearance of the normal jackpot result may be troublesome, and there is a risk that the effect of the presentation will be reduced. . In this regard, in this modification, when the current stop pattern is the same as the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past, the execution of the fifth notification effect C3 is limited. As a result, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player with the appearance of the normal jackpot result, and the ease of playing is improved.

  Also, by displaying the fourth notification effect C2 that is used even when the stop pattern does not overlap, it is possible to eliminate or reduce the sense of incongruity for a player who has not seen the stop pattern. It is possible to make a configuration that also takes into account the various players.

  In the present modification, the fifth notification effect C4 is not executed when the same stop pattern as the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result is already stopped and displayed in the jackpot series. The fifth notification effect C4 may be less likely to be executed as compared to the case where the same stop pattern is not stopped and displayed.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, when the same stop picture as the stop picture already stopped and displayed in the jackpot consecutive resort is selected, the button operation image 408 that prompts the operation of the effect operation unit 75 is not displayed, and the change is surely performed. This is different from the first embodiment in that presence / absence is notified. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing 7R probability change effect determination processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 in the present modification. Note that the processing in step S1701 shown in FIG. 34A is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1404 in FIG. 28, and is executed instead of step S1409 in FIG.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, that is, if the current stop picture grasped in step S1402 is included in the stop pictures before the current grasp obtained in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1701. A sixth notification effect C4 is set as the notification effect. The sixth notification effect C4 is the same as the fourth notification effect C2 of FIG. 29 except that the button operation image 408 is not displayed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 34 (b1) and 34 (b2), in the third round game, the girl character 401 intends to transform into a wizard character 405, and if the transformation is successful, the probability variation game. Then, in the fourth round game, a video representing the state of transformation is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (b3), a result image is displayed in which a wizard character 405 that has been successfully transformed appears in the fifth round game. In displaying the result image of FIG. 34 (b3), the button operation image 408 (FIG. 29 (c)) is not displayed immediately before that, and there is no operation of the effect operation unit 75 or the passage (end) of the operation valid period. Even so, the result video is displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the type of jackpot that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode was a probabilistic jackpot result.

  In the case of notifying whether or not the result is a probability change jackpot result by the post-notification effect, the button operation image 408 is displayed, and then the result is a probability change jackpot result in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 75 being operated. By adopting a configuration for notifying (displaying the result video) whether or not, it is possible to give the player a real feeling of participation in the game, and there is an advantage that the post-notification effect is excited. However, when the player can determine that the result is a probable jackpot result before the execution of the post-notification effect, it is possible to predict the development of the effect after operating the effect operation unit 75. In other words, the act of operating the production operation unit 75 may be troublesome, and the production effect may be reduced. In this regard, in the present modification, as a post notification effect, a sixth notification effect C4 not accompanied by the display of the button operation image 408 is prepared separately from the fourth notification effect C2 accompanied by the display of the button operation image 408. When the stop pattern is the same pattern as the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past, the sixth notification effect C4 is executed by restricting the execution of the fourth notification effect C2. Thereby, the troublesomeness of the player for the button operation image 408 and the button operation can be reduced, and the ease of playing is improved.

  In the present modification, the sixth notification effect C4 has the same configuration as the fourth notification effect C2, specifically, the button operation image 408 is omitted from the fourth notification effect C2. In this case, when the current stop picture overlaps with the stop picture for the probable jackpot result displayed in the past, an effect similar to the notification effect used even when the stop picture does not overlap is performed. Become. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate or reduce a sense of incongruity for a player who has not seen the stop pattern.

  Furthermore, in this modified example, similarly to the modified example 1 described above, when the current stop picture and the stop picture for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past overlap, the revival effect is not performed as the post-notification effect. It has become. Therefore, the pseudo result image that appears to be uncertain is not displayed, and an effect of reducing the troublesomeness can be expected.

  Here, the timing at which the result video of FIG. 34 (b3) is displayed in the sixth notification effect C4, that is, the suggestion timing that suggests the probability variation jackpot result will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a timing chart for explaining the round effect of the fifth round when the third notification effect C1 and the fourth notification effect C2 are executed and when the sixth notification effect C4 is executed.

  When the third notification effect C1 and the fourth notification effect C2 are executed, the transformation from the start timing (timing t21) of the fifth round game to the timing t22 when the predetermined first period has elapsed. A video (FIG. 27 (b), FIG. 29 (b)) representing the midway state is displayed. This video is displayed continuously from the round effect of the fourth round. In order to ensure continuity with the round effect of the fourth round, the above video is a round interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round (the variable winning device 32 is closed and the round game of the fifth round is played). It is also preferable to be displayed during the period of waiting for the start.

  Then, at the timing t22 when the first period has elapsed, a button operation image 408 (FIGS. 27C and 29C) that prompts the player to operate the effect operation unit 75 is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the sixth notification effect C4 is executed, the transformation occurs between the start timing (timing t21) of the fifth round game and the timing t23 when the second period longer than the first period has elapsed. The video of FIG. 34 (b2) representing the midway state is displayed. Again, the video in FIG. 34 (b2) is the same as in FIG. 27 (b) and FIG. 29 (b).

  Then, at the timing t23 when the second period has elapsed, a result video (FIG. 34 (b3)) suggesting that it is a probable big hit result is displayed. As described above, in the present modification, when the sixth notification effect C4 is executed, the video switching is not performed at the timing t22 when the button operation image 408 is displayed in the third notification effect C1 or the fourth notification effect C2. The result video is displayed later than that.

  With such a configuration, the button operation image 408 is displayed for a player who has not seen the stop picture, that is, a player who is watching the post-notification effect without knowing that it is a probable big hit result. Based on the fact that it is not displayed at the right timing, it is possible to predict that it is a probabilistic jackpot result before displaying the result video, such as “That? Button press image does not appear. Become. That is, the presence / absence of the button operation image 408 functions as an indication as to whether or not it is a probable big hit result. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the probability variation jackpot result for a player who has determined the probability variation jackpot result in advance while suppressing the troublesome operation of the button operation image 408 and the production operation unit 75. For players who have not been discriminated in advance, it is possible to provide a way to enjoy that the button operation image 408 is not displayed in the post-notification effect, and it is possible to adopt a configuration that takes into account both players.

  The timing t23 at which the result video is displayed in the sixth notification effect C4 is the end timing of the operation effective period in the third notification effect C1 or the fourth notification effect C2 (end timing when the effect operation unit 75 is not operated). The timing is earlier than the timing t24. That is, in the sixth notification effect C4, the result image is displayed earlier than the display timing of the result image when the operation valid period has passed without the effect operation unit 75 being operated in the third notification effect C1 or the fourth notification effect C2. It is configured to display. As a result, although the display timing of the result video is delayed from the display timing of the button operation image 408, the probability change jackpot result is notified to the player who knows in advance that it is the probability change jackpot result. Excessive waiting is suppressed.

  In this modification, the button operation image 408 is not displayed in the post notification effect when the same stop pattern as the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result is already stopped in the jackpot series. Although the configuration is adopted, the button operation image 408 may be less likely to be displayed as compared with the case where the same stop pattern is not stopped and displayed.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the determination process of the post-notification effect is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, when selecting the post-notification effect, not only the history of the stop pattern but also the operation unit 75 for the effect. The operation state is taken into consideration. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In these drawings, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

<About round effect processing>
FIG. 36A is a flowchart showing round effect processing executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82. This process is performed as a part of the effect control process of FIG. 21, and is specifically performed after the execution process of the opening / closing execution mode effect in step S1003.

  In the round effect process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the round game. Specifically, it is determined whether an open command has been received.

  If it is the start timing of the round game, a round effect setting process is executed in step S1902. In the setting process, an effect setting for one round game is performed in accordance with the contents set in the round effect process in FIG. Specifically, various setting processes are performed so that the notification effect is set in a predetermined round game after being set in the round effect process. After execution of step S1902, the round effect process is terminated.

  If it is not the start timing of the round game, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the round game is being executed. When the round game is not being played, the round effect process is terminated, while when the round game is being played, the round effect process is executed in step S1904. The in-round effect process controls the effect during the round game in accordance with the contents set in step S1902. Here, the in-round effect process in step S1904 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Since the present embodiment is characterized in that the post notification effect is selected in consideration of the operation state of the effect operation unit 75, the operation effect of the effect operation unit 75 is executed here. The round game, that is, the round game in the fifth round of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 7R probability variable jackpot result will be described, and the illustration and description of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to other jackpot types and round games of other rounds will be omitted. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the in-round effect process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the post notification effect flag C1, C2, or C3 is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. When any one of these flags is stored, in the opening / closing execution mode effect process of FIG. 24, setting is performed to execute any one of the third notification effect C1, the fourth notification effect C2, and the fifth notification effect C3. (See step S1309 in FIG. 24). In this case, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not the current round game is the fifth round game, that is, the round game in which the operation effect of the effect operation unit 75 is to be executed.

  In the case of the fifth round game, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the operation effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The operation effect flag corresponds to the operation effect of the effect operation unit 75, and when the flag is stored, it means that the operation effect is being executed.

  If the operation effect flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2004 whether it is the start timing of the operation effect. If it is the start timing of the operation effect, an operation effect process is executed in step S2005. In the operation effect processing, a command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so that the button operation image 408 is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In the subsequent step S2006, the operation effect flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244.

  After the execution of step S2006 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2003 (when it is determined that the operation effect flag is stored), it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the effect operation unit 75 has been operated. This determination is performed by referring to a detection signal output from the operation unit detection sensor 75a. If it is determined that the production operation unit 75 has been operated, it is determined in step S2008 whether the operation is valid. In other words, in this step, it is determined whether or not the operation determined to be performed in step S2007 is within the operation valid period.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2007 that the effect operation unit 75 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2009 to determine whether or not the operation valid period has ended. That is, in this step, it is determined whether or not the operation effective period has passed without the operation of the effect operation unit 75 being performed.

  If it is determined in step S2008 that the grasped operation is within the operation effective period, or if it is determined in step S2009 that the operation effective period has passed without any operation, the RAM 244 is updated in step S2010. It is determined whether the post notification effect flag C2 or C3 is stored in the various flag storage areas. If any of these flags is stored, it means that the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 7R probability variation jackpot result. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2011 to store the operation result information. To do.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36B, an operation history storage area 301 is provided in the RAM 244 of the effect control device 82. In step S2011 in FIG. 37, the determination results in steps S2007 to S2009 are displayed. The corresponding operation result information is stored in the operation history storage area 301. Specifically, when it is determined that the operation is performed during the operation valid period based on the determinations in steps S2007 and S2008, the fact that the operation is performed is stored as operation result information. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation has not been performed as determined in steps S2007 and S2009, the fact that the operation has not been performed is stored.

  Information on the operation result is stored and accumulated in the operation history storage area 301 each time the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 7R probability variation jackpot result is executed and the operation effect is executed. The MPU 242 manages the accumulated operation result information as operation history information indicating the player's operation history for the effect operation unit 75. All the operation history information stored (accumulated) in the operation history storage area 301 is erased (cleared) when the short-time gaming state is ended, that is, when the jackpot reaming is ended, as in the case of the stop pattern history information. Is done.

  In the above configuration, the operation result information is stored both when the operation is performed and when the operation is not performed, but the operation result information is stored only when the operation is performed, and the operation result is stored. If no information is stored, it may be configured to indicate that no operation has been performed. On the contrary, the operation result may be stored only when the operation is not performed. In short, any information may be stored as long as information regarding the operation is stored so that it can be identified whether or not the operation has been performed.

  After execution of step S2011, the operation effect flag stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 is erased at the end of the operation effect in step S2012. In the subsequent step S2013, the result video of the third notification effect C1 or the fourth notification effect C2 (FIGS. 27 (d) and 29 (d)) or the pseudo result of the fifth notification effect C3 (FIG. 30 (a)). Is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a command is transmitted to the display control device 212.

  After execution of step S2013, or when a negative determination is made in step S2001, step S2002, step S2004, step S2008, or step S2009, the in-round effect process is terminated.

<About 7R Probability Effect Determination Processing>
Next, the 7R probability variation effect determination process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described. The 7R probability change effect determination process is for determining the mode of post-notification effect when the jackpot type is the 7R probability change jackpot result, and is executed in step S1308 in the opening / closing execution mode effect process of FIG. Is.

  Here, parts different from the 7R probability variation effect determination processing according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 28 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing 7R probability variation effect determination processing according to the present embodiment. The processing in steps S2101 to S2106 shown in FIG. 38 is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1404 in FIG. 28, and is executed instead of step S1409 in FIG.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, that is, if the current stop picture grasped in step S1402 is included in the stop pictures before this time grasped in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S2101 and the RAM 244 is executed. It is determined whether or not the specific notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247. The specific notification flag is stored when the second notification effect B (FIG. 26) is executed in place of the fourth notification effect C2 (FIG. 29) or the fifth notification effect C3 (FIG. 30) that notifies the probability change. It is. For this reason, when the specific notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 at the time of the processing in step S2101, the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth in the opening / closing execution mode before this time in the jackpot renso. It means that the replacement from the notification effect C3 to the second notification effect B has already been performed.

  As a result of the determination processing in step S2101, if it is determined that the specific notification flag is not stored, that is, if the above replacement is not performed during the jackpot villa, in step S2102, the operation history storage area of the RAM 244 is stored. The operation result history information is grasped with reference to 301. In a succeeding step S2103, it is determined whether or not there is a previous operation based on the grasping result in the step S2102. That is, in the jackpot ream, the same stop pattern as the current stop pattern is stopped and displayed. Of the past 7R probability variation jackpots, the operation section 75 is operated in the previous jackpot operation effect. It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined that the operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2104, and the operation of the effect operation unit 75 is performed in the operation effect at the previous jackpot out of the plurality of past 7R probability variation jackpots. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2104 or a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S1405 of FIG. Thereafter, based on the lottery result of the revival effect, the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is set as the subsequent notification effect.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, in the operation effect at the time of the big hit the previous time among the 7R probability variation big wins of the past several times in which the same stop picture as the current stop picture is stopped and displayed in the big hit consecutive resort. When the operation unit 75 is operated and no operation is performed in the previous operation effect at the big hit, the process proceeds to step S2105, and the second notification effect B is set as the subsequent notification effect. Moreover, also when it affirmation determinates by step S2101 (when a specific alerting | reporting flag is stored), it progresses to step S2105 and sets the 2nd alerting | reporting effect B as a post-notification effect.

  After execution of step S2105, specific notification flag processing is executed in step S2106. In the process for the specific notification flag, when the specific notification flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244 at that time, the flag is stored in the storage area 247. Maintain that state. Note that the specific notification flag is deleted (cleared) when the short-time gaming state is ended, that is, when the jackpot consecutive villa is ended. After execution of step S2106, the 7R probability variation effect determination process is terminated.

<About selection mode of post-notification production>
Next, the selection mode of the post notification effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As already described, in the present embodiment, not only the 7R probability variation jackpot having the same stop pattern has occurred several times during the jackpot retreat, but also the operation status of the production operation unit 75 is taken into account later. It is the structure which selects the aspect (type) of alerting | reporting effect. Here, it is assumed that the 7R probability variation jackpot that has the same stop pattern as the current 7R probability variation jackpot has occurred twice before this time, and the selection mode of the post-notification effect in the current (third) 7R probability variation jackpot Will be described. In the following description, “previous jackpot” and “previous jackpot” refer to the previous jackpot and the previous jackpot of the three 7R probability variation jackpots having the same stop pattern.

  As shown to Fig.39 (a), the 4th notification effect C2 or the 5th notification effect C3 is set as a back notification effect at the time of the last big hit and the last big hit. An operation effect is set for each of these notification effects C2 and C3, and an opportunity to operate the effect operation unit 75 is provided for the effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (b1), the production operation section 75 is operated in the previous operation operation effect in the big hit regardless of the operation operation portion 75 in the previous big hit operation, regardless of the operation operation 75 in the production operation. If it is not, the stop pattern is being watched, and at the time of the previous jackpot, the same stop pattern as the previous jackpot was stopped and displayed. As a result, there is a high possibility that the player has a low willingness to operate and has not operated. In this case, it is estimated that the player knows that it is a probability change jackpot result before the display of the button operation image 408, and the probability change is notified earlier and more simply than the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3. The second notification effect B to be set is set.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (b2), when the production operation unit 75 is operated both in the operation presentation at the previous big hit and the operation presentation at the previous big hit, the current post-announcement presentation is performed. The fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is set. That is, the same stop picture as the last big hit is displayed and stopped at the previous big hit, and if the stop picture is seen, it can be grasped that it is a promising big hit. If it is, it is estimated that the player is not determined before the display of the button operation image 408, and the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is set as usual.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (b3), when the operation unit 75 for performance is not operated in both the operation effect at the time of the last big hit and the operation effect at the time of the previous big hit, the post notification effect of this time The fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is set. In this case, since it is difficult to estimate whether or not the player has preliminarily determined the probability variation jackpot result from the operation status, the normal setting is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (b4), when the production operation unit 75 is not operated in the last big hitting operation effect, and the production operation unit 75 is operated in the last big operation operation effect. In addition, since it is difficult to estimate whether or not the player has previously determined the probability variation jackpot result from the operation situation, the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is set.

  The “previous jackpot”, “previous jackpot”, and “this jackpot” are not limited to the case where the same 7R probability variation jackpot stop pattern is displayed three times in the jackpot series, but on the main display unit 43. It is only necessary that the 7R probability variation jackpot displayed stop picture overlaps with a past stop picture, that is, a situation where the probability variation jackpot result can be discriminated from the contrast between the stop pictures twice. In the example shown in FIG. 39C, the first and third jackpots in which the stop pattern of the stop result data B5 is displayed correspond to the “previous jackpot” and “previous jackpot”, respectively, and the stop result data B3 The second jackpot in which the stop pattern is displayed and the fourth jackpot in which the stop pattern overlaps correspond to “this jackpot”. In addition, since “the operation performance in the operation effect at the time of the big hit of the last time” is merely for determining whether or not the player has an intention or a tendency to operate the production operation unit 75, “the big hit of the previous time” May not display the same stop pattern as “previous jackpot” or “this jackpot”.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Although the same stop picture as the past stop picture that has entered the probable gaming state is displayed, a player who has not been able to discriminate in advance that it is a probable jackpot result or is not interested in discrimination and has not made a discrimination It is also assumed that Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, when the operation history of the production operation unit 75 is stored in the operation history storage area 301, and the current stop pattern is the same as the previous stop pattern for probability change, It is determined from the operation history of the effect operation unit 75 stored in the operation history storage area 301 whether or not the player has actually determined the probability change jackpot result, and the content of the post notification effect is changed in consideration of the determination. It was set as the structure to do. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the player has actually determined the probability variation jackpot result from the player's operation results, and the presentation can be changed based on the determination. As a result, it is possible to perform effect switching in accordance with the actual situation of the player, and it is possible to suitably suppress the function for the identified player from affecting the game of the unidentified player. .

  When the operation unit 75 for production is not operated by the operation effect at the time of the last big hit, and when it is operated by the operation effect at the time of the last big hit, from the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 In addition, the second notification effect B for notifying early and simple probability change is executed. That is, it is presumed that the player who originally has a tendency to operate the production operation unit 75 did not operate the previous operation production because he knew the probability variation jackpot result in advance, and the player actually made the probability variation in advance. The configuration is regarded as discriminating. Accordingly, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the second notification effect B is executed when there is a high possibility that the player has previously determined the probability change.

  In addition, when the operation unit 75 for production is not operated by the operation effect at the time of the last big hit, and it is operated by the operation effect at the last big hit time, it is replaced with the second notification effect B. As a configuration in which the fourth notification effect C2 is performed as in Modification 1 of the first embodiment, or as a configuration in which the sixth notification effect C4 is performed as in Modification 2 of the first embodiment. Also good.

  When the production operation unit 75 is operated in both of the previous jackpot operation effect and the previous jackpot operation effect, the fourth notification effect is regarded as a player whose probability change has not been determined in advance. The configuration is such that C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is executed. This makes it possible to realize a configuration in which the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is executed when there is a high possibility that the player has not previously determined the probability change.

  A configuration in which the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is executed when the operation unit 75 for the effect is not operated in both the operation effect at the time of the previous jackpot and the operation effect at the time of the previous jackpot. did. That is, when there is no operation record in both the previous time and the previous time, it is highly likely that the player is originally not willing to operate the production operation unit 75, and whether or not the probability change has been determined in advance Therefore, the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is executed safely. Thereby, even if the player has not previously determined the probability change, the inconvenience that the operation effect is not performed can be suppressed.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the notification target of the post-notification effect is different from the above-described embodiments. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is notified by the post notification effect, but in this embodiment, the mode (type) of the opening / closing execution mode is notified by the post notification effect. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the distribution table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table. The 7R probability variation jackpot result, the 7R normal jackpot result, and the 3R normal jackpot result in the same figure are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The distribution table is a table used to distribute the jackpot type when the result of the lottery determination is a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are set as a 15R probability variation jackpot result A and a 15R probability variation jackpot result B. The 15R probability variation jackpot results A and B are those in which 15 round games are executed, but in some round games, the embodiment, specifically, the open / close mode of the variable winning device 32 is different.

  Here, the aspect of each round game implemented with 15R probability variation jackpot results A and B will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as a mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the round game is relatively high and low. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode are set so that In the high-frequency winning mode, the grand prize opening 32a is opened and closed once per round game, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds (high frequency time) elapses or the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening 32a is 10. It continues until it becomes a piece (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed once per round game, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec (low frequency time) elapses or to the large winning opening 32a. This is continued until the number of winning prizes reaches 6 (low frequency).

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PE every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the one big winning opening 32a is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, although a maximum of 6 winnings are allowed, the actual expected winning value of the game ball is zero.

  In the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time (upper limit duration) for one opening and the opening limit number (upper limit winning number) for one opening are lower in the high frequency winning mode. As long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 is higher than that in the frequency winning mode, the value is not limited to the above value. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode may be set longer than the low-frequency winning mode, or the opening limit number for one opening may be set longer.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low-frequency winning mode, the winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It may be configured. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than the open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one large winning opening 32a are not as described above, in the low-frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 is not substantially generated.

  In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the jackpot type is 15R probability variable jackpot result A, the first round to the sixth round game and the seventh round to the 15th round With the round game of the eyes, the variable winning device 32 is driven and controlled in the high-frequency winning mode. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the 15R probability variable jackpot result B, in the round games of the first to sixth rounds, the variable winning device 32 is driven and controlled in the high-frequency winning mode, but the seventh to the 15th rounds. In the round game, the variable winning device 32 is driven and controlled in the low frequency winning mode.

  In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result B is variable between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode (jackpot game) as compared to the 15R probability variation jackpot result A because the low-frequency winning mode is set for some round games. The total number of winning prizes to the winning device 32 is reduced. Therefore, when the 15R probability variation jackpot result B is selected, the total number of game balls (prize balls) that can be acquired in the opening / closing execution mode is smaller than that in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result A. Therefore, the 15R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the 15R probability variation jackpot result B.

  In the distribution table shown in FIG. 40A, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 19”, “0” corresponds to the 15R jackpot result A, and “1” corresponds to the 15R jackpot result B. It corresponds.

  Next, the stop result table according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The stop result data when the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is “2 to 19” is the same as the stop result table (FIG. 15) according to the first embodiment. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (c), in this embodiment, “0” of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with the stop picture of the stop result data A1, and “1” of the big hit type counter C2 is the stop result. Corresponding to the stop picture of data A2. In the distribution table of FIG. 40A, the 15R probability variation jackpot result A corresponds to “0” of the jackpot type counter C2, and the 15R probability variation jackpot result B corresponds to “1” of the jackpot type counter C2. . Therefore, the stop pattern of the stop result data A1 is a pattern indicating the 15R probability variation jackpot result A, and the stop pattern of the stop result data A2 is a pattern indicating the 15R probability change jackpot result B.

  When the jackpot is notified on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot results A and B, the 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the 15R probability variation jackpot result B are identified from the viewpoint of the player. The occurrence of jackpots is reported in a manner that makes it impossible or difficult. Specifically, in both the 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the 15R probability variation jackpot result B, the same specific symbol (designated with the number “7” (FIG. 7 ( g))) combination is stopped and displayed.

  At the start of the opening / closing execution mode (big hit game), the total number of rounds executed in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed on the round display portion RS of the main display portion 43, but the 15R probability variable jackpot results A, B In either case, “15” is displayed or a display corresponding to the display (corresponding to 15 rounds, but different from the number). For this reason, it is impossible or difficult to distinguish the 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the 15R probability variation jackpot result B from the display content of the round display section RS. In addition, the said display in round display part RS continues being displayed until the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode, maintaining the display content.

<About special prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. Note that the processing in steps S2301 to S2306 shown in FIG. 41 is executed after execution of step S604 in FIG. 17, and is executed in place of steps S605 and S606.

  When the big winning opening 32a opening process (a process for setting the variable winning driving unit 32d to be in a driving state so that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) is executed in step S604, the big hit type in this big jackpot is determined in step S2301. It is determined whether or not the 15R probability variation jackpot result B.

  If it is not 15R probability variation jackpot result B, it means that the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot result A, 7R probability variation jackpot result, 7R ordinary jackpot result or 3R ordinary jackpot result. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2302. As the opening time setting process, “15000” (30 sec) corresponding to the upper limit opening time is input to the timer counter T. In the subsequent step S2303, as the upper limit winning number setting process, “10” corresponding to the upper limit winning number is input to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the release command setting process in step S607.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the 15R probability variation jackpot result B is, it is determined in step S2304 whether or not the current round game is a round game in the seventh to fifteenth rounds. If it is not a round game of the 7th to 15th rounds, that is, if it is a round game of the 1st to 6th rounds, the process proceeds to step S2302, and the timer counter T is set to “15000” corresponding to the upper limit opening time. After that, in step S2303, “10” corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings is input to the winning counter PC.

  On the other hand, in the case of the round game of the seventh round to the fifteenth round, “100” (0.2 sec) corresponding to the upper limit opening time is input to the timer counter T in step S2305. In the subsequent step S2306, a process of inputting “6” corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the winning counter PC is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the release command setting process in step S607.

<About the opening / closing execution mode effect processing>
Next, the opening / closing execution mode effect process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the opening / closing execution mode effect process. Note that the processing in steps S2401 to S2404 shown in FIG. 42A is executed when a negative determination is made in step S1302 in FIG. 24, and is executed instead of steps S1304 to S1305 in FIG. Is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1302, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot type that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is not the 3R normal jackpot result, the jackpot type is 15R probability variable jackpot result B in step S2401. It is determined whether or not. If it is the 15R probability variation big hit result B, the seventh notification effect D1 is set as the subsequent notification effect in step S2402. The seventh notification effect D1 is that the current opening / closing execution mode is the latter opening / closing execution mode that is on the disadvantage side of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result A and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 15R probability variation jackpot result B. In other words, the player is notified that the round game after the seventh round is executed in the low-frequency winning mode.

  The seventh notification effect D1 is an effect that notifies the player that if the goal is achieved, it is advantageous for the player, then challenges the achievement of the goal, and notifies the result (end) of the failure. For example, as in the third notification effect C1 of FIG. 27, the girl character 401 tries to transform into the wizard character 405 and fails to transform. In this case, as the character display 407, for example, “LUCKY if transformed into a wizard” is displayed.

  The seventh notification effect D1 is notified that the seventh round game (the round game in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is switched to the low-frequency winning mode) is started is the disadvantage-side opening / closing execution mode. To be executed. For example, as in the case of the third notification effect C1, the display corresponding to FIG. 27A is performed in the third round game, and the display corresponding to FIG. 27B is performed in the fourth round game. In the fifth round game, the display corresponding to FIGS. 27C and 27D (display of the button operation image 408 and the video of the failure result) is performed.

  After execution of step S2402, the process proceeds to step S1309 in FIG. 24 (processing for setting a post notification effect flag). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot result A. If it is the 15R probability variation jackpot result B, the 15R jackpot A effect determination process is executed in step S2404.

  FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing 15R jackpot A effect determination processing. The effect determination process for 15R jackpot A is substantially the same as the effect determination process for 7R probability change in FIG. 28. Specifically, instead of step S1407 to step S1409 in FIG. 28, step in FIG. Except for executing steps S2501 to S2503, the process is the same as the 7R probability change effect determination process. In the following, these different processes will be described.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1406 (when the resurrection lottery is not won), an eighth notification effect D2 is set as a subsequent notification effect in step S2501. The eighth notification effect D2 notifies the player that the current opening / closing execution mode is the advantageous opening / closing execution mode. In other words, the round games after the seventh round are in the high-frequency winning mode. This is to inform that it will be implemented.

  The eighth notification effect D2 is an effect that notifies the player that if the goal is achieved, it is advantageous for the player, then challenges the achievement of the goal, and notifies the result of success (end). For example, as in the fourth notification effect C2 in FIG. 29, the girl character 401 challenges the transformation to the wizard character 405 and succeeds in the transformation. As in the case of the seventh notification effect D1, the eighth notification effect D2 is executed so that the fact that it is the advantageous opening / closing execution mode is notified before the seventh round game is started. For example, as in the case of the fourth notification effect C2, the display corresponding to FIG. 29 (a) is performed in the third round game, and the display corresponding to FIG. 29 (b) is performed in the fourth round game. In the fifth round game, the display corresponding to FIGS. 29C and 29D (display of the button operation image 408 and the video of the success result) is performed.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, a ninth notification effect D3 is set as the subsequent notification effect. The ninth notification effect D3 is to notify the player that the open / close execution mode is the same as the eighth notification effect D2, but the revival effect as shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b). It is to do. The ninth notification effect D3 is also executed so that the fact that the open / close execution mode is on the advantageous side is notified before the seventh round game is started.

  If an affirmative decision is made in step S1404, that is, if the current stop picture grasped in step S1402 is included in the stop pictures before the current grasp obtained in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S2503. The tenth notification effect D4 is set as the subsequent notification effect. The tenth notification effect D4 notifies the player earlier and more simply than the eighth notification effect D2 and the ninth notification effect D3 that the current opening / closing execution mode is the advantageous opening / closing execution mode. . In the tenth notification effect D4, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, the wizard character 405 appears from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, “LUCKY” or the like is displayed as the character display 406.

<About selection mode of post-notification production>
Next, the selection mode of the post notification effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, as a so-called first hit, a big hit (first big hit) of the 15R probability variation big hit result A in which the stop pattern of the stop result data A1 is stopped and displayed is generated, and then the stop result data A2 A big hit of the 15R probability variation jackpot result B in which the stop pattern is stopped (second jackpot) and a big hit of the 15R probability variation jackpot result A in which the stop pattern of the stop result data A1 is stopped (third jackpot) are generated. Shall be.

  Since the first jackpot is the first hit, there is no jackpot before that in the jackpot reaming period. In this case, in accordance with the result of the resurrection effect lottery process in step S1406 of FIG. 28, the eighth notification effect D2 in which the transformation into the wizard character 405 succeeds, and the transformation succeeds in the resurrection after the transformation once fails. One of the 9 notification effects D3 is selected as the subsequent notification effect.

  The second jackpot is a Renso jackpot. In this case, the stop picture (stop result data A2) that is stopped and displayed on the result display sections AS and BS in the game round when the jackpot occurs is grasped. Then, referring to the past stop patterns stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250, it is determined whether or not the same stop pattern as the grasped pattern has been stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 43, since there is no jackpot in which the stop result data A2 is stopped and displayed before the second jackpot, as in the case of the first jackpot, the eighth alert effect D2 or the ninth alert effect D3. Is selected as the post notification effect.

  The third jackpot is the same as the second jackpot, so it is the same as the current stop picture (stop result data A1) with reference to the past stop pictures stored in the stop picture history storage area 250. It is determined whether an object has been stopped. The third jackpot stop pattern is the same as the first jackpot stop pattern. In this case, the player who is viewing the stop pattern displays the same stop pattern as the first jackpot stop pattern. Therefore, it can be determined in advance that the open / close execution mode is on the advantageous side. In such a case, the tenth notification effect D4 is selected without selecting the eighth notification effect D2 or the ninth notification effect D3 as the subsequent notification effect. This notifies the player that the opening / closing execution mode on the advantageous side is early and simple, and prevents the post-notification effect from becoming bothersome.

  Thus, the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15R probability variation big hit result A) advantageous to the player and the unfavorable opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15R probability variation big hit result B) are set. The number of rounds and the symbols displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 cannot be distinguished from each other, and the opening / closing execution mode is notified by the post notification effect. Thus, apart from the opportunity to enjoy whether or not it is a big hit, an opportunity to enjoy whether or not it becomes an advantageous opening and closing execution mode is secured, and the interest is improved.

  Under such circumstances, when the current stop pattern is the same as the stop pattern for the advantageous opening / closing execution mode displayed in the past, the eighth notification effect D2 and the ninth notification effect D3 are used as the subsequent notification effects. Instead, the tenth notification effect D4 is executed. Thereby, when the player can determine from the display contents of the result display parts AS and BS of the main display part 43 that the opening / closing execution mode is on the advantageous side before the execution of the post-notification effect, the advantageous side is simple and early. The opening / closing execution mode can be suggested (notified), and the same effect as in the first embodiment can be obtained.

  In the above configuration, when the current stop picture is the same as the stop picture for the advantageous opening / closing execution mode displayed in the past, the advantageous opening / closing execution mode is set more simply and earlier than the other. When the stop pattern of this time is the same as the stop pattern for the disadvantaged opening / closing execution mode displayed in the past, the disadvantageous opening / closing execution mode is simpler and earlier than the other case. A suggested configuration may be used. Specifically, instead of the seventh notification effect D1, for example, an effect indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is on the disadvantage side from the start of the opening / closing execution mode is executed as in the first notification effect A shown in FIG. Good.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first modification of the first embodiment, an eighth notification effect D2 is set instead of the tenth notification effect D4 (the revival effect is not performed). Alternatively, as in the second modification of the first embodiment, the button operation image 408 is not displayed, and the video of the success result is displayed even if the production operation unit 75 is not operated. Good. Further, as in the second embodiment, the post notification effect may be selected in consideration of the operation state of the effect operation unit 75.

<Fourth embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the current stop picture overlaps with a stoppage pattern for probability variation jackpots displayed in the past, a part of the effect is not executed (the effect is reduced). The form is different in that an effect is added when stop pictures overlap. In the present embodiment, the mode of the post notification effect performed on the display screen G is not changed regardless of whether or not the same stop picture is displayed. Specifically, in the 7R probability changing effect determination process of FIG. 28, the processes of steps S1401 to S1404 and S1409 are omitted. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board. In the present embodiment, the decorative member 39 is provided with a light emitting portion 501. The light emitting unit 501 is disposed around the main display unit 43, and more specifically, is disposed at a location closer to the main display unit 43 (result display units AS and BS) than the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The light emitting unit 501 is provided with a light emitting substrate so as to be positioned behind the decorative member 39, and one light emitting element (for example, LED) is mounted on the light emitting substrate. The light emitting unit 501 is configured so that the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting element in a front view from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  The light emitting substrate of the light emitting unit 501 is electrically connected to the effect control device 82 through electric wiring, and when the drive signal is output from the effect control device 82, the light emitting unit 501 (light emitting element) has a predetermined emission color. Illuminated in red (for example, red). In other words, the effect control device 82 controls switching between the lighting state (light emitting state) and the light-off state (non-light emitting state) of the light emitting unit 501. In addition, the light emission part 501 is normally controlled so that it may be maintained in a light extinction state.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 501 is configured to perform specific notification when the current stop picture overlaps with the probability change big hit stop picture displayed in the past.

  Next, the specific notification process executed by the MPU 242 of the effect control device 82 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is executed as part of the effect control process of FIG.

  In the specific notification process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not a specific state flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 247 of the RAM 244. The specific state flag is a flag indicating that the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state or a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the process of step S2601 is a process of determining whether or not the resort is in a retreat.

  If it is determined in step S2601 that the specific state flag is stored, it is determined in step S2602 whether or not it is a variation end timing. Specifically, it is determined whether a change end command (step S309 in FIG. 13) transmitted from main controller 81 has been received.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the timing is the end of change, it is determined in step S2603 whether the current lottery result and the jackpot type distribution result are the probable big hit results. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a probability variation hit result command (step S409 in FIG. 14) transmitted from main controller 81 has been received.

  When it is determined in step S2603 that the result is a probable big hit result, in step S2604, the picture stopped and displayed on the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS in the current game round is grasped. The stop picture grasping process is performed by referring to the stop picture history information stored in the stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 or by referring to the probability variation stop result command transmitted from the main control device 81.

  In subsequent step S2605, the stop pattern history information stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is referred to, and the stop pattern stopped and displayed in the game times before the current game time is grasped. Note that the stop pattern history information stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is erased when the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state ends (see step S1107 in FIG. 22). In this case, the stop picture before this time will be grasped for the consecutive jackpot period.

  In the subsequent step S2606, the current stop picture grasped in step S2604 is compared with the stop picture preceding this time grasped in step S2605, and the stop picture before this time is the same as the present stop picture. It is determined whether or not there is a stop picture. That is, it is determined whether or not the same stop picture as the current stop picture has already been displayed during the jackpot consecutive period.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, that is, if the current stop picture grasped in step S2604 is included in the stop pictures prior to the current time grasped in step S2605, the process proceeds to step S2607 to emit light. A process of setting the light emission timing of the unit 501 is executed. In this process, a standby time from the end of game times (end of change) to the light emission timing of the light emitting unit 501 is set, and a predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) is set as the standby time. This predetermined period is shorter than the period from the end of the game time until the probable big hit result is suggested by the post notification effect. Specifically, when the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3 are performed as the post notification effect, the light emission is performed before the result image of FIG. 29D and the revived image of FIG. 30B are displayed. The predetermined period is determined so that the unit 501 emits light.

  After executing step S2607, the specific notification process is terminated. In the production control device 82, after setting the light emission timing of the light emitting unit 501 as described above, the subsequent elapsed time is measured at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec which is the execution cycle of the production control process in FIG. 21). And when the said predetermined period passes, it controls so that the light emission part 501 may be switched from a light extinction state to a lighting state. At this time, the lighting time of the light emitting unit 501 (the duration of the lighting state) is a short predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec), specifically, the stop display period (for example, 1 sec) of the stop pattern in the game times. It is a short time. When the lighting time elapses after the light emitting unit 501 is turned on, the light emitting unit 501 is switched to the off state again.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in steps S2601, S2602, S2603, and S2606, the specific notification process is terminated without setting the light emission timing of the light emitting unit 501. In this case, specific notification (lighting of the light emitting unit 501) is not performed.

<About the game flow>
As in the case of the first jackpot and the fourth jackpot in FIG. 32 illustrated in the first embodiment, a 7R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the jackpot renso, and the stop pattern at that time is 7R in the past. If it is the same as the stop picture when the probability change jackpot result is reached, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the end of the current game round, the light emitting unit 501 is turned on and a specific notification is performed. A player who has determined that the probability variation jackpot result is based on the comparison between the current stop pattern and the previous stop pattern can be confident that it is the probability variation jackpot result by looking at the specific notification.

  Since the lighting time of the light emitting unit 501 at that time is short, there is a possibility that a player who has not seen the stop picture or has not determined the probable big hit result from the stop picture may miss the specific notification. It is high and can suppress noticing specific notification. Thereby, it is possible to provide an effect that the person who knows the specific notification knows, and it becomes possible for a player who is convinced of the probable change jackpot result to experience a sense of superiority.

  Moreover, the light emission start timing of the light emission part 501 is a timing before the result of a probable big hit is suggested by the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3 as the subsequent notification effects. Thereby, the player who recognizes the presence of the specific notification can be convinced of the probabilistic jackpot result earlier than the general player who does not, and can further enhance the sense of superiority.

  Incidentally, even if the current stop picture is a probability change jackpot stop picture, the specific notification is not executed if it does not match the past probability change jackpot stop picture stored in the stop picture history storage area 250.

  In the present embodiment, a first gaming state having a probability variation gaming state and a short-time gaming state, and having a relatively different degree of advantage for the player as the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode (special gaming state) ends. And a second gaming state, but as in the third embodiment, it has an opening / closing execution mode advantageous to the player and an unfavorable opening / closing execution mode, and the first opening / closing execution mode (special gaming state) is provided. It is good also as a structure provided with a game state and a 2nd game state.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  When the probability change jackpot stop pattern this time overlaps with the past probability change jackpot stop pattern, a specific notification is made. As a result, the following effects can be expected.

  When the probability change jackpot result has been assigned, if the same stop picture as the stop picture at that time is performed again, it is conceivable that some players discriminate the probability change jackpot result from the comparison of the stop pictures. However, the determination in this case is merely self-judgment that relies on the player's memory, and does not exceed the prediction range.

  In view of this point, in this embodiment, the history of the probability variation jackpot stop pattern is stored, and if the history includes the same stop pattern information as the current probability variation jackpot stop pattern, It was set as the structure which performs specific alerting | reporting. According to this structure, when a player discriminate | determines the probability variation jackpot result from contrast of a stop pattern, a player's judgment will be boosted by subsequent specific alerting | reporting. As a result, the player can be confident of his / her own judgment, and the sense of accomplishment and superiority that perceives the probabilistic jackpot result from the display of the main display unit 43 is enhanced, and the interest is improved.

  The lighting time of the light emitting unit 501 (execution period of specific notification) is set to be shorter than the display time of the stop picture. Since the lighting time of the light emitting unit 501 is shortened, a player who does not know the specific notification is suppressed from noticing the specific notification. As described above, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the specific notification, the recognition degree of the specific notification for a general player can be kept low. Thereby, it is possible to make it known to those who know the specific notification, and it is possible to suitably enhance the superiority of the player who is convinced of the probability variation jackpot result by the specific notification. Moreover, since it is difficult for a general player to notice the specific notification, an effect of suppressing the specific notification from interfering with the enjoyment of the game can be expected.

  In addition to the specific notification, the post notification effect (the fourth notification effect C2 and the fifth notification effect C3) is configured to be executed, and the specific notification is executed before the probability change jackpot result is suggested by the post notification effect. .

  By executing the post-notification effect separately from the specific notification, it is appropriate that a general player who does not determine the probability variation jackpot result from the stop picture or does not know the specific notification is a probability variation jackpot result. Can let you know. At that time, by adopting a configuration in which the specific notification is performed before the suggestion of the probability change by the post notification effect, the player who is convinced of the probability change jackpot result by the specific notification is convinced of the probability change jackpot result earlier than the general player who is not. can do. That is, it is possible to favorably secure the superiority of a specific player while suppressing the influence on the game of the general player.

  A light emitting unit 501 is provided separately from the symbol display device 41 and specific notification is executed by the light emitting unit 501. Since it is assumed that a general player concentrates on the post-notification effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the general player can be separated from the display screen G by separating the execution location of the specific notification. It is possible to make it difficult to notice specific notifications. At that time, the specific notification can be performed with a simple configuration by performing the specific notification in the light emitting unit 501. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the designer at the time of designing the gaming machine and the processing load on the control as compared with the case where the specific notification is made by, for example, a moving image.

  The light emitting unit 501 is disposed at a location closer to the main display unit 43 (result display units AS, BS) than the symbol display device 41 (display screen G) in a front view from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, for the player who determines the probability variation jackpot result from the stop pattern, the line of sight movement from the main display unit 43 can be reduced so that the light emitting unit 501 can be visually recognized, and oversight of the specific notification can be suppressed. On the other hand, for a general player, the light emitting unit 501 is less likely to be seen, and it is possible to prevent the specific notification from interfering with the enjoyment of the game.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the stop picture history is managed by the main control device 81, and the end condition of the high frequency support mode (short-time gaming state) is changed according to the stop picture history status. It is different from the form. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49.

<Variation start processing>
FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the change start process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. The various processes shown in FIG. 46A are executed after step S405 in FIG. 14 is executed.

  After the jackpot type is sorted with reference to the sorting table (FIG. 10) in step S405, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the sorting result in step S405 is a probability variation jackpot result. If the result is a probable big hit result, the process proceeds from step S407 to step S409, and then proceeds to the variable display time setting process in step S413. Since each process of step S407-step S409 and step S413 is the same as that of what is shown in FIG. 14, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that the distribution result in step S405 is not a probabilistic jackpot result, that is, if the distribution result is a normal jackpot result, a stop result for normal jackpot is displayed in step S410. Execute the setting process. In this step, referring to the stop result table (FIG. 15), if the distribution result is a 7R normal jackpot result, any one of the stop result data C1 to C6 is set as the stop result, and the 3R normal jackpot result is set. In some cases, either stop result data D1 or D2 is set as the stop result.

  In the subsequent step S411, the normal flag is stored in the various flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The normal flag is information for the MPU 202 to identify which normal jackpot result is the result of determining whether or not the current game is successful. In step S411, if the distribution result in step S405 is a 7R normal jackpot result, a 7R normal flag is stored, and if it is a 3R normal jackpot result, a 3R normal flag is stored.

  In subsequent step S2701, information on the stop result set in step S410 is stored. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the stop picture history storage area 302 is provided in the RAM 204 of the main controller 81. In step S2701 in FIG. 46 (a), the result display section AS, Information on the stop result displayed on the BS is stored in the stop picture history storage area 302. The information on the stop result is stored and accumulated in the stop picture history storage area 302 every time a stop result for a normal jackpot is set, in other words, every time a normal jackpot result is obtained. The MPU 202 manages the accumulated stop result information as history information indicating a history of a stoppage pattern for a normal jackpot.

  After execution of step S2701, it is determined in step S2702 whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the high probability mode flag is not stored, it is determined in step S2703 whether a high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The determination process of step S2702 and step S2703 substantially determines whether or not the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state. If the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state, that is, in step S2703. If an affirmative determination is made, a short / medium time hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S2704. The short / medium win flag indicates that the jackpot is won during the short game state, and the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result.

  After the execution of step S2704, when an affirmative determination is made at step S2702, or a negative determination is made at step S2703, the process of step S413 is executed.

<Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode>
Next, transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The various processes shown in FIG. 47 are executed when a negative determination is made in step S701 in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the 15R probability variation flag or the 7R probability variation flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, in step S705, information for specifying the gaming state is deleted. A flag erasing process for erasing the flag is executed. Specifically, when an opening / closing execution mode flag, a high probability mode flag, and a high frequency support flag are stored, they are deleted. However, in this step, the time / short hit flag is not deleted. In other words, when the flag for short and medium hits is stored in the various flag storage areas 235, the flag is not deleted and the stored state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S706, the high frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state (the gaming state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode).

  After execution of step S706, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not a short / medium hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the short / medium win flag is not stored, “50” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S2802. The short-time gaming state is to end when the number of games reaches the end reference number after the transition, and the end reference number is set to 50 by the process of step S2802. After execution of step S2802, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the time-short-term hit flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2803, and the result display section AS in the current game time (game time executed immediately before the opening / closing execution mode). , The picture stopped and displayed on the BS is grasped. The stop picture grasping process is performed by referring to the stop picture history information stored in the stop picture history storage area 302 of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S2804, the stop pattern history information stored in the stop pattern history storage area 302 is referred to, and the stop pattern stopped and displayed in the previous normal jackpot result is grasped. Next, in step S2805, the current stop picture grasped in step S2803 is compared with the stop picture displayed in the previous normal jackpot result grasped in step S2804, and whether or not they match. Determine.

  If they match and the current stop pattern is the same as the previous stop pattern, “100” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S2806. Thereby, the end reference number of times of the short-time gaming state is set to 100 times larger than that in the case of step S2802, and the time-short gaming state end condition becomes advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, if they do not match and the current stop pattern is different from the previous stop pattern, “50” is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S2807. Thereby, the end reference number of times-short gaming state is set to 50 as in the case of step S2802.

  After execution of step S2806 or step S2807, the short / medium hit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S2808. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

<Migration process when missed>
Next, transition processing at the time of detachment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the various processes shown in FIG. 48 are executed when a negative determination is made in step S801 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the high probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, is the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 in step S802? Determine whether or not. If the high-frequency support flag is stored, that is, if the gaming state at that time is the short-time gaming state, the process proceeds to step S803, and whether or not the information in the game number counter area is “0”. judge.

  As already described, the information in the game number counter area is updated when one game number is completed (see step S310 in FIG. 13). Therefore, the information in the game number counter area is “0”. This means that the number of game times executed since the transition to the gaming state has reached the end reference number. If it is determined that the information in the number-of-games counter area is “0”, the history information of the stopped picture stored in the stopped picture history storage area 302 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S2901. That is, the history of the stop pattern stored in the stop pattern history storage area 302 is completely deleted when the time-saving gaming state is ended.

  After execution of step S2901, the process proceeds to step S804 in FIG. 19 (high frequency support flag erasing process). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802 or step S803, the shift processing at the time of disconnection is terminated.

<Termination conditions for short-time gaming state>
Next, the end condition of the short-time gaming state in this embodiment, that is, the end reference count of the high frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the end reference count of the high-frequency support mode that shifts after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot changes depending on the situation when the normal jackpot result is reached.

  When a normal jackpot result is obtained in a gaming state other than the short-time gaming state, that is, in the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the end reference number of high-frequency support modes after the opening / closing execution mode ends is set to 50 times. In addition, when the normal jackpot result is in the short-time gaming state, and this stop picture is different from the stop picture at the time of the previous normal jackpot result (at the time of the jackpot that triggered the short-time gaming state), open and close The end reference count of the high frequency support mode after the end of the execution mode is set to 50 times. That is, in this embodiment, when the gaming state shifts to the short-time gaming state, the end reference number is basically set to 50 times.

  In these cases, the time-saving ending effect shown in FIG. 49B is executed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. In the effect, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, a video is displayed to notify that the state is shifted to the short-time game state and that the state continues for 50 game times. For example, “Chance! ”And the like are displayed. In the short-time gaming state, as in the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode during the game turn is different from the effect state in the normal game state and the probability variation game state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), when the normal jackpot result is obtained during the short-time gaming state, and the stop picture of the current stop picture and the stop picture of the previous normal jackpot result are the same, the open / close execution mode is set. The reference end number of the high frequency support mode after the end is set to 100 times. As a result, the end reference count is set to a greater number than usual, and the high-frequency support mode (short-time gaming state) is extended. Thus, when the same stop picture as the previous stop picture is assigned, the end reference count is set to a special number in return. For this reason, not only simply winning a jackpot, but also having the pleasure of assigning the same stop pattern is added, and the interest is improved.

  By the way, by limiting the period of whether or not the same stop pattern can be assigned to the short-time game state, the end reference number of short-time game state changes depending on the previous player's game result, or the own game result is Influencing the next player's end reference count is suppressed. In other words, the short-time gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and it is considered that the player is less likely to stop the game while the player is in that state, and the player is unlikely to change. Therefore, by limiting to the short-time gaming state, when the same player (one player) allocates the same stop pattern as the previous time, the end reference count increases (the transition period to the short-time gaming state is long). Can be configured.

  As described above, a special effect is executed in the short-time game state, and it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in the short-time game state from the effect side. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the inconvenience that the player quits the game without noticing that the player is in the short-time gaming state.

  When the end reference number is set to 100 times, the time-saving ending effect shown in FIG. 49B is executed in the ending period of the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, when the number of games since the transition to the short-time game state reaches 50 times (basic end reference number), a notification that the short-time game state is extended is performed as shown in FIG. In this notification, for example, “LUCKY!

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports that the reference | standard reference | standard frequency | count is 100 times from the beginning instead of FIG.49 (c). For example, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports that it transfers to a time-saving game state after completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode in a time-saving ending effect, and the said state continues over 50 game times.

  Further, the end reference number of times described in this embodiment is merely an example, and can be arbitrarily changed, for example, the basic end reference number is set to 100 and the special end reference number is set to 150. is there.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The history of the stop picture displayed on the main display unit 43 is stored, and the end condition of the short-time gaming state is changed based on the history. That is, as the end condition, there are a first end condition (the number of games is 100 times) and a second end condition (the number of games is 50 times) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. They are configured to be selectively set according to the situation. In this case, a change occurs in the game development after shifting to the short-time game state depending on what kind of stop pattern is assigned. As a result, it is not limited to a game that expects to be a big hit or to shift to a short-time gaming state, but it is possible to give a game that enjoys what kind of stop picture is displayed and what kind of history situation it will be Yes, it adds an interesting aspect that has never been seen before. Therefore, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and increase the game motivation. In addition, the player's interest in the stop pattern displayed on the main display unit 43 can be increased, and an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be expected.

  The first end condition is set when the current stop pattern is the same as the previous stop pattern, and the second end condition is set otherwise. Thereby, a game for enjoying whether or not the current stop pattern is the same as the past stop pattern can be given. In addition, it can be expected that the player can easily determine whether or not a condition for satisfying the first end condition is satisfied. In other words, if it is a configuration that becomes the first end condition by becoming a specific combination other than the above-mentioned stop pictures that match, the player needs to know the combination pattern in advance, Therefore, it is only necessary to compare whether or not the current stop pattern is the same as the previous stop pattern, and the player can easily understand the structure.

  The first end condition is more advantageous for the player than the second end condition. In this case, it is possible to provide fun for playing in the hope that the current stop pattern and the previous stop pattern are the same.

  The stop picture history displayed on the main display unit 43 is used. The main display unit 43 is smaller than the symbol display device 41 and is inconspicuous when viewed from the player. By adopting a configuration that uses such an inconspicuous display history, it is possible for a player who wants to enjoy the short-time gaming state without grasping the end condition from the stop picture to easily see the stop picture. It can be configured with consideration for such a player.

  On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the display corresponds to the result of the lottery determination, and the display is different from the stop symbol displayed on the result display sections AS and BS (display of symbols). In this case, a player who wants to enjoy the short-time gaming state without grasping the ending condition from the stop picture can look at the display screen G and perform the lottery determination without looking at the result display parts AS and BS of the main display part 43. It becomes possible to know the result. Moreover, since the symbols displayed on the display screen G are different from the stop symbols displayed on the result display portions AS and BS, even if the display screen G is viewed, the results are displayed on the result display portions AS and BS. The history of the stop picture to be displayed cannot be grasped. This makes it possible to respond to a player's request that does not want to know the conditions for ending the short-time gaming state in advance, while appropriately notifying the result of the lottery.

  When a normal jackpot result is obtained during the short-time gaming state, the stop pattern history is referred to and the end condition of the short-time gaming state corresponding to the normal jackpot result is determined. Thereby, it can be set as the structure where the completion conditions of a time-short game state change according to the log | history condition of the stop picture in the same player.

  During the opening / closing execution mode, a winning lottery is not performed and a new stop pattern is not stopped and displayed. For example, if the winning / losing lottery is performed during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and a new stop pattern is stopped and displayed, the history may be updated / changed. In order to avoid watching and changing the history, it is necessary to play the opening / closing execution mode while avoiding winning to the operation ports 33 and 34, and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the opening / closing execution mode. In this regard, in this configuration, a new history of the stop pattern does not occur during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode (the history is not updated or changed), so the player can enter the opening / closing execution mode without worrying about the history change. It becomes possible to play.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first to fourth embodiments, the history of the stop pattern is stored for the jackpot and the history is referred to (referenced), the comparison between the stop pattern of this time and the past stop pattern, Although the post-notification effect is switched, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in response to power-on of the pachinko machine 10 (power switch installed in the pachinko machine 10 is turned on), the storage of the history of the stop pattern is started, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (the power switch is turned off or the pachinko machine 10 is turned off). Stop the history of the history of the stop picture in response to the stop of the power supply to the history), and refer to the history from the start of the history storage until the end of the history storage, contrast, post-notification effect It is good also as a structure which switches. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to switch the post notification effect for one business day of the game hall.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a timer, and when a predetermined first time elapses from a predetermined trigger such as power-on, the history storage is started, and the first time or a second time different from the first time elapses from the start of the storage. Then, it is good also as a structure which complete | finishes the memory | storage of a log | history and performs the reference of a log | history, contrast, and the switch of a post-notification effect between them. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a clock function (a function for generating time information), and history storage is started when the first time is reached, and the history is recorded when a predetermined time has elapsed from the first time. It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes memory | storage and performs the reference of a log | history, contrast, and the switch of a post-notification effect between them.

  Further, the player may determine a history storage start timing and an end timing (in other words, a history storage period is determined). Specifically, by performing a predetermined operation using the operation unit 75 for production or a different operation unit that can be operated by the player, the presence / absence of history storage and the presence / absence of switching of the post notification effect (history reference It may be configured to be able to switch the presence / absence).

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which memorize | stores a log | history for every player. As such a configuration, for example, the following can be considered. Normally, the history storage is turned off, and the history storage can be switched to the on state by performing a predetermined operation using an operation unit operable by the player. When the switching operation to the ON state is performed, for example, a password or the like is displayed on the display screen G and unique identification information is issued (output). Then, after allowing the player to input identification information to the pachinko machine 10 by the operation unit, when the same identification information as the issued identification information is input, the history is stored following the previous history. In this case, a history is stored (accumulated) corresponding to the identification information, and a history corresponding to each player is generated. At this time, the target period of history storage may be unlimited, or may be configured to be a predetermined period (for example, one month).

  (2) In the first to third embodiments, when the current stop picture matches the stop picture displayed in the past, the type of the post-notification effect is switched. It is good also as composition which switches production. For example, if the current stop picture does not match the stop picture displayed in the past, an effect during game play (for example, a background image or background color on the display screen G, a light emission color or light emission pattern of the display light emitting unit 63, a speaker, etc. If the aspect of the sound effect from the part 64 is the first aspect (for example, the effect A), and the stop pictures match, the aspect of the effect during the game is different from the first aspect. It is good also as a structure switched to an aspect (for example, set it as production B). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which switches the effect in opening / closing execution mode instead of or in addition to the effect during game play.

  In these cases, it is not always necessary to change the presentation according to the difference between the current stop picture and the previously displayed stop picture, and the presentation can be switched according to the history of the stop picture history. If it is enough. For example, the presentation is switched when triggered by the fact that a predetermined combination is configured by the preceding and following stop patterns, such as the previous stop pattern being the stop result data B4 and the current stop pattern being the stop result data C2. Also good.

  (3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the stop picture displayed in the past or its history is displayed on the display screen G or a display part different from it (third display different from the result display part AS, BS or result display part AS, BS). Part) may be displayed. In this case, it is not necessary for the player to remember the stop pictures displayed in the past, and the comparison of the stop pictures becomes easy. At this time, since it may be assumed that there is a player who does not want to grasp the history of the stop pattern, the stop pattern displayed in the past by the player operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the operation unit for effect 75). Or it is good to be the structure which can switch the display presence or absence of the log | history.

  (4) In the first to fourth embodiments, as a specific example in which the display unit of the result display unit is formed smaller than the rendering unit of the production unit, the result display units AS and BS of the main display unit 43 are symbols. Although the structure formed smaller than the display device 41 and the display screen G is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display unit and the production unit are other than the result display units AS, BS, and the display screen G. There may be. For example, a movable accessory mounted on the pachinko machine 10, a light emitting unit (lighting unit), or the like may correspond to the effect unit. The “display unit formed smaller than the production unit” in the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the display unit is formed smaller than all the production units when there are a plurality of production units. What is necessary is just to form a display part smaller than one of the production parts.

  (5) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the production control device 82 is configured to store (manage) the stop picture history, but the area for storing the stop picture history in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81. The main controller 81 may record (manage) the history. In such a configuration, the main control device 81 refers to the history stored in the area to compare the current stop picture and the stop picture displayed in the past, and when the stop pictures match, A command indicating that is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the effect control device 82. By receiving the command, the effect control device 82 grasps that the current stop picture matches the stop picture displayed in the past, and switches the post-notification effect based on that.

  In this case, the information indicating that the respective stop pictures match may be transmitted by a dedicated command, or may be included in a change command or a type command. Further, the information does not necessarily need to be transmitted at the start of fluctuation, and may be transmitted before the determination (setting) timing of the post notification effect in the effect control device 82. In that sense, the information may be transmitted by being included in a variation end command transmitted at the end of variation, a command (for example, an opening command) transmitted in association with the opening / closing execution mode, or the like.

  Further, the display control device 212 may store (manage) the history of the stop pattern. In this case, it is preferable that the probability change hitting stop command command (information indicating the stop pattern) from the main control device 81 is output to the display control device 212 via the effect control device 82.

  (6) In the first embodiment, when the current stop pattern overlaps with the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past, the fourth notification effect C2 or the fifth notification effect C3 is always used. Although it was set as the structure where the 2nd alerting | reporting effect B is performed, when the stop picture of this time overlaps with the stop picture for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past, compared with the case where they do not overlap, it is the 4th alerting effect. The second notification effect B may be more easily executed than C2 or the fifth notification effect C3. In short, any configuration may be employed as long as it determines which post-notification effect is performed based on the history of the stop pattern or changes the selection mode of the post-notification effect based on the history. The same applies to the first and second modifications according to the first embodiment and the second and third embodiments.

  In addition, as a structure which becomes easy to perform the 2nd alerting | reporting effect B rather than the 4th alerting | reporting effect C2 or the 5th alerting | reporting effect C3, for example, both when a stop picture overlaps and when it does not overlap, The second notification effect B, the fourth notification effect C2, and the fifth notification effect C3 can be executed. In the former case, each effect is such that the second notification effect B is more easily selected than in the latter case. A configuration is possible in which the selection probability is set.

  (7) In the first embodiment, after determining whether or not the current stop pattern overlaps the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past, the post-notification effect is performed based on the determination result. Although it was set as the structure which determines whether it is set as the 2nd alerting | reporting effect B, the 4th alerting | reporting effect C2, or the 5th alerting | reporting effect C3, either the 4th alerting | reporting effect C2 or the 5th alerting | reporting effect C3 is set as a post-notification effect. After the selection, it is determined whether or not the current stop pattern overlaps with the stop pattern for the probability variation jackpot result displayed in the past, and the post notification effect is replaced with the second notification effect B based on the determination result. Also good. At this time, when the overlap between stop pictures is determined, the configuration is not limited to the second notification effect B, and a lottery (determination) as to whether or not to replace is performed. Based on the result, the second notification effect B is determined. It is good also as a structure replaced with. The same applies to the first and second modifications according to the first embodiment and the second and third embodiments.

  (8) In the first to fourth embodiments, the information indicating the stop pattern is transmitted to the effect control device 82 using the probability change stop result command. However, the information is used as a change command or a type command. It is good also as a structure which transmits by including. In this case, it is good also as a structure which transmits the information which shows a stop picture (stop picture of stop result data B1-B10) included in a change command or a type command only when it is a 7R probability change jackpot result, Regardless, information indicating all the stop pictures may be included in the variation command or the type command and transmitted. Further, the information indicating the stop pattern does not necessarily need to be transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and may be transmitted before the determination (setting) timing of the post notification effect in the effect control device 82. In that sense, the information may be transmitted by being included in a variation end command transmitted at the end of variation, a command (for example, an opening command) transmitted in association with the opening / closing execution mode, or the like.

  (9) In the first to fourth embodiments, the post-notification effect is performed using the video displayed on the display screen G. However, the post-notification effect is a light emission effect using light emitting means such as an LED. There may be an effect production using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for movable production. Furthermore, it is not necessarily visual, and may be auditory using sound effects, for example. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides another display apparatus separately from the symbol display apparatus 41, and displays a post-notification effect on the display screen of the said display apparatus.

  (10) In each of the embodiments described above, the history of the stop pattern is stored. However, the history of the jackpot type indicated by the type command or the command may be stored. In addition, in the “history of information relating to transition correspondence result display (or grant result display, game result)” in the present invention, in addition to a stop pattern history, a history of information on type commands and jackpot types (called jackpot types, etc.) It can be understood that it is included. And in the configuration for storing the history of information such as the jackpot type, in response to the fact that the current jackpot type or the like matches the past jackpot type or the like, or the history of the jackpot type or the like becomes a predetermined history It can be set as the structure which switches the kind of post-notification production or another production. The jackpot type information is information that is a basis for determining the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, the upper limit opening time of the variable winning device 32 in one round game, and the upper limit winning number to the big winning opening 32a in one round game. Therefore, it can be regarded as information corresponding to the operation mode (opening / closing pattern) of the variable winning device 32. Therefore, it can be understood that the “history of information relating to transition correspondence result display (or giving result display, game result)” includes information history of the above-described operation mode (opening / closing pattern).

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winnings to the operation ports 33 and 34, and the hold information is stored with a predetermined number (four) as the upper limit. May not be stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. The same applies to the winning to the through gate 35.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on winning to the upper working port 33 is stored with the upper limit being four, but it may be less than four or may be five or more. May be. Further, the upper limit storage number of the hold information based on the winnings to the lower operation port 34 and the through gate 35 may be less than 4, or 5 or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the upper limit memory | storage number of the hold information based on the winning to each operating port 33,34 and the through gate 35 differs.

  (13) In the first to fourth embodiments, the high-frequency support end command is transmitted from the main control device 81, and the production control device 82 grasps the end of the specific state (big hit consecutive state) based on this command. However, the high-frequency support end command may not be transmitted, and the effect control device 82 may count the number of times the game has been executed and grasp the end of the specific state based on the count. Specifically, based on the change end command (information indicating the end of game times) transmitted from the main control device 81, the number of game times executed after shifting to the short-time game state is counted. When the number of executions reaches a count value corresponding to reaching the upper limit (100 times), it may be determined that the specific state has ended.

  (14) In the first to fourth embodiments, the specific state flag is turned on based on receiving the ending command (command corresponding to the start of ending). It is good also as a structure which turns ON a specific state flag based on transmitting this and receiving the said command. That is, the specific state flag may be turned on in accordance with the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  (15) In the first to fourth embodiments, only the information on the stop pattern corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result among the stop patterns corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 as a history. However, not only the stop picture corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result but also the stop picture corresponding to a part or all of the normal jackpot results may be stored. However, as in the above-described embodiment, only the stop pattern corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored, and when referring to the history, the stop pattern stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is selected. This eliminates the need for the processing load. From such a viewpoint, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

  Further, among the stop patterns corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result, only the information of the stop pattern of the 7R probability variation jackpot result in which it is not determined from the number of rounds whether or not the probability variation jackpot result is determined may be stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250. Good. In the case of a player, when it is determined whether or not it is a probable jackpot result from the number of rounds, the presence or absence of a probable change is determined by looking at the round display section RS, and if not, the presence or absence of a probable change is determined from the stop picture This is because it is considered. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load associated with the history storage process in addition to suppressing the capacity consumption of the stopped picture history storage area 250 (RAM 204).

  In the above case, the main control device 81 may determine whether or not the result is a 7R probability variation jackpot result, or the production control device 82 may perform the determination. In the former case, for example, in the main control device 81, it is determined whether or not it is a 7R probability variation jackpot result based on the distribution result of the jackpot type. It is preferable that a command indicating information is transmitted to the effect control device 82. In the latter case, for example, the effect control device 82 determines whether or not the 7R probability variation jackpot result is based on the probability variation hit result command transmitted from the main control device 81, and determines that it is the 7R probability variation jackpot result. In such a case, the stop pattern information may be stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, when the current jackpot result is a 7R probability variation jackpot result, the stop pattern history stored in the stop pattern history storage area 250 is referred to (understood). It is good also as a structure which refers the said log | history, when it is a probable big hit result regardless of the number of rounds. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which refers to the said log | history based on the number of rounds of jackpot regardless of whether it is a probabilistic jackpot result. For example, when the probability of probability variation jackpot is 15R jackpot result or 7R jackpot result, it is configured to refer to the history, or when it is 7R jackpot result with possibility of both probability variation jackpot and non-probability jackpot The history can be referred to.

  (17) In the above embodiments, in the main display unit 43 (result display unit AS, BS) as the result display unit, the stop picture is displayed both when the result of the lottery result is a jackpot result and when the result is a missed result. May be displayed, but the stop pattern may be displayed only when the result is a jackpot result. In other words, it is sufficient that the result display means displays at least a jackpot stop picture.

  (18) In the first to fourth embodiments, the post-notification effect is started after the display of the stop pattern is started. However, the post-notification effect itself starts before the start of the display of the stop pattern. It is good also as a structure which performs the suggestion of the probability variation jackpot result performed in after performing the display of a stop picture. In this case, since the post-notification effect can be started early, it is advantageous when it is desired to ensure a long effect execution period.

  (19) In the first to third embodiments, the post notification effect (the second notification effect B, the fourth notification effect C2, the sixth notification effect C4) when the current stop pattern matches the past stop pattern. The tenth notification effect D4) is configured to be performed in the opening / closing execution mode, as in the case where the respective stop pictures do not match, but is configured to be executed in the game times performed immediately before the opening / closing execution mode. Also good. In other words, when the current stop pattern matches the previous stop pattern, the probability variation game may be suggested and the effect for that may be performed before the stop pattern is displayed. As a result, the probable gaming state can be suggested more quickly.

  In addition, the suggestion (notification) of the probability variation gaming state in the above case is, for example, by stopping the chance symbol with a combination of the same symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and then displaying the chance symbol at that time The display color is displayed in a special color (for example, gold) that is different from the normal color, the symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the same specific symbols, and characters and characters corresponding to the probable jackpot result are displayed in the game times. In the game times, a sound effect (so-called definite sound) that is not output in the case of a normal jackpot result or different from that output in the case of a normal jackpot result is output, for example, a probability variation lamp, etc. A specific light-emitting display unit (which normally does not emit light in the case of a big hit result) can be considered to emit light.

  (20) In the first to third embodiments, both the post-notification effect as the specific effect and the button operation image 408 as the predetermined notification for prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 75 are displayed on the symbol display device 41. Although it is configured to display on the display screen G, the predetermined notification may be executed by a predetermined notification unit that is different from the production unit that performs the specific effect.

  (21) In the first to fourth embodiments, the post notification effect is performed in the opening / closing execution mode. However, the post notification effect may be performed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. That is, it is sufficient if it is performed after the display of the stop picture is started. However, if the post-notification effect is made after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, there is a period during which the player is forced to play a game without knowing whether the game is in the probable game state or the short-time game state. In order to avoid the occurrence of such a period, it is preferable to adopt the configuration of each of the above embodiments.

  (22) In the first to fourth embodiments, the stop picture of this time is stopped and displayed in the past as a predetermined situation in which the player can determine the probable big hit result before the execution of the post notification effect (suggest effect). Although the case where it matches with the stop picture for probability variation jackpot results was illustrated, as the predetermined situation, for example, the following may be considered.

  Provided with destination specifying means (so-called hold prefetching function) for predetermining the hold information (special information) stored in the electric role holding area 233 at a timing earlier than the hold information is the target of the determination. Based on a specific result, a situation in which an indication corresponding to a probability change jackpot result or a notification corresponding to a probability change jackpot result is performed at a timing earlier than the hold information becomes a target of the success / failure determination (for example, a probability change suggestion by a hold picture or a probability change notification) ).

  When the result of the success / failure determination is a jackpot result and the distribution result of the jackpot type is a probability change jackpot result, a situation in which the probability change gaming state is suggested or notified in the game times corresponding to the determination of success / failure (for example, probability change) Final notice of confirmation).

  In the case of a jackpot result in which the number of rounds is a predetermined number of times, a situation in which display corresponding to the number of rounds of the predetermined number of times is performed on the round display unit RS in a configuration in which a transition to the probability variation gaming state is surely performed. That is, a situation in which the transition from the display content of the round display unit RS to the probability change gaming state can be determined.

  (23) In the above first to fourth embodiments, the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode (special gaming state) includes the probability variation gaming state and the short-time gaming state, but the short-time gaming state and the normal gaming state are provided. It is good also as a structure provided. In this case, the jackpot consecutive villa period is from the first hit (big hit that occurs in the normal gaming state) that triggers the transition to the short-time gaming state until it falls to the normal gaming state through the short-time gaming state The history of the stop pattern information may be stored for this period.

  As an example of a gaming machine having a short-time gaming state and a normal gaming state as a gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends, a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine can be considered. Examples of such gaming machines include the following.

  When the result of the winning / losing lottery based on the winning to one of the operating ports 33 is a big hit result, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode (big hit gaming state) for opening and closing the variable winning device 32. As a jackpot type when the jackpot result is based on the winning to the operating port 33, the jackpot result with a short time that shifts to the short-time gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the transition to the normal gaming state (the transition to the short-time gaming state) No) A timeless jackpot result is set, and when it is assigned to a time-saving jackpot result, the game shifts to a time-saving gaming state (so-called rush state) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Note that the operation port 33 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the first result display unit AS displays a jackpot stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot result with a short time.

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning frequency to the other operating port 34 is high, but the winning / losing lottery based on winning to the operating port 34 includes a small hit result. Then, the process shifts to an opening / closing execution mode (small winning game state) in which the variable winning device 32 or a second variable winning device different from the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed. The operation port 34 corresponds to the second special symbol, and a stop pattern for small hitting is displayed on the second result display unit BS. The game ball that has won a prize in the variable prize winning device 32 or the second variable prize winning device passes through the V prize opening provided in the prize winning device, so that it is more advantageous for the player than in the case of the small win result. Then, the state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode (a jackpot gaming state) for opening / closing the variable winning device 32 or the second variable winning device.

  The types of the small hit results are as follows. When a game ball passes through the V winning opening and shifts to the big hit gaming state, then the short hitting result when the game ball shifts to the short winning gaming state and the gaming ball passes through the V winning opening. Then, when shifting to the jackpot gaming state, the timeless hitting result is set to shift to the normal gaming state (does not shift to the time-saving gaming state). In other words, when a small hit game corresponding to the timed hit result is performed, the game ball passes through the V winning opening, so that after the big hit game ends, the game shifts again to the short time game state, and the rush state continues. In this case, as the stop picture displayed on the second result display unit BS, the stop picture corresponding to the time-struck hit result is displayed as being able to shift to the time-short game state after the small hit game state. A plurality of patterns (display modes) are set in the time-stricken hit result, and any one of them is selected and displayed.

  Therefore, when the current stop picture is the same as the stop picture that was displayed in the past as a part for the time saving, it is possible to grasp the transition to the time saving gaming state based on the stop picture. Further, after the display of the stop picture (for example, during the jackpot game), a post-notification effect is provided as a post-notification effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended is a short-time gaming state. In such a configuration, as in the first to fourth embodiments, the history of the stop pattern is stored, and the mode of the post notification effect is switched with reference to the history, or the specific notification is executed. It can be configured. In this case, the small winning stop picture and the small winning gaming state correspond to “transition correspondence result display” and “special gaming state”, respectively, and the short-time gaming state (rush state) is “first gaming state” or “first gaming state”. This corresponds to “2 gaming states”.

  The game state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (special game state) may include a probability variation game state and a normal game state, or may include a probability variation game state, a short-time game state, and a normal game state. . In the latter configuration, two of these three gaming states can be set to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, respectively. Furthermore, in addition to the above three gaming states, the gaming state has a gaming state having a different degree of advantage for the player, and the gaming state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (special gaming state) is four or more gaming states. It is good also as a structure provided with. In this case, two of the four or more gaming states can be set as the first gaming state and the second gaming state, respectively.

  (24) In the first to third embodiments described above, when the current stop picture matches the stop picture displayed in the past, the probable jackpot result is suggested earlier in the post-notification production than when the stop picture does not match ( Notification), but a configuration that suggests (notifies) later than the case where they do not match may be adopted.

  In the configuration that suggests the probable gaming state earlier than the case where they do not match, a special effect different from the post-notification effect may be performed using the idle time of the effect execution caused by that. That is, it is good to set it as the structure which performs the effect which is not performed as said special effect when said each stop picture does not correspond. As a special effect in this case, for example, a destination specifying means for specifying the holding information (special information) stored in the electronic role holding area 233 at a timing earlier than the holding information is a target of the determination of whether or not the holding is made ( A so-called hold prefetching function) that performs notification corresponding to the pre-specified result can be considered. Specifically, as a special effect, there is on-hold information corresponding to the jackpot result among the on-hold information (or whether there is such on-hold information, whether there is a so-called pending resort ) Is suggested (notifying). The result of the above-mentioned hold prefetching (specifically, whether or not there is a suspended renso) cannot be determined from the displayed stop picture, so whether or not the player is watching the stop picture Will attract. That is, it is preferable that the special effect suggest (notify) a game result that cannot be discriminated from the stop picture, specifically, a game result that cannot be discriminated or predicted from the displayed stop picture. Thus, it is possible to provide an effect that can be enjoyed by both a player who is watching the stop pattern and a player who is not watching the stop picture.

  (25) In the first to third embodiments described above, in accordance with the history of the stop pattern, the effect that suggests the probable jackpot result among the post-notification effects is switched, but the normal jackpot result (non-probable jackpot) It is good also as a structure which switches the production | presentation which suggests a result. Specifically, it is configured to determine whether or not the current stop picture and the normal jackpot stop picture displayed in the past match, and if both do not match, the third notification effect C1 is displayed. If the two match, the first notification effect A is executed. In other words, if the current stop picture is the same as the normal jackpot stop picture displayed in the past, the player who is viewing the stop picture can determine the normal jackpot result before the execution of the post notification effect. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in each of the above embodiments by executing the first notification effect A that suggests the normal jackpot result more simply and earlier than usual. Become. In this case, instead of the first notification effect A, the button operation image 408 is not displayed as in the second modification of the first embodiment, and the player is not required to operate the effect operation unit 75. You may make it perform the effect which abbreviate | omitted the display of the button operation image 408 from the produced effect, specifically the 3rd alerting | reporting effect C1.

  In addition, the switching of the post notification effect in the case of the normal jackpot result may be performed in conjunction with the switching of the post notification effect in the case of the probability variation jackpot result described in the first to third embodiments, It is good also as a structure performed instead.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the log | history of the stop picture for jackpots regardless of a probability change and non-probability, and compares the ratio of the stop picture for probability change big hits, and the stop picture for non-probability big hits in the said log | history. In addition, it may be configured such that the type of the post notification effect is switched between a case where the ratio of the stop pattern for non-probable variation jackpot is higher than that for probability variation jackpot and a case where it is not. Specifically, when the proportion of stop patterns for non-probable big hits is higher than that for probable big wins, the post-notification effect is switched so that the probable or non-probable notifications are made simpler and earlier than in other cases. It may be configured. A player who expects to have a probable jackpot result may be frustrated if the occurrence frequency of non-probable jackpot results is high in previous games. It is assumed that the appearance of the normal jackpot result in the notification effect (the fifth notification effect C4), the operation of the button operation image 408, and the effect operation unit 75 become troublesome. For this reason, by setting it as the said structure, it becomes possible to reduce the troublesomeness with respect to the said appearance.

  (26) In the first to fourth embodiments, the post-notification effect is performed in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode. However, the next round game starts after the opening period or the round game ends. It is good also as a structure which performs a post-notification effect in the waiting period (what is called a round interval period) until it is done, and an ending period. These periods can be said to be periods in which the player does not have to worry about whether or not the game ball wins the big prize opening 32a because the variable prize winning device 32 (big prize opening 32a) is closed. By performing the post-notification effect by utilizing such a period, it becomes easier for the player to concentrate on the post-notification effect, and as a result of watching the variable prize winning device 32, the inconvenience such as missed the post-notification effect. Can be suppressed. In addition, since round games end when the maximum number of winning game balls wins, the execution period varies depending on the winning situation each time, but there is no such variation in the opening period or round interval period. In addition, since the execution period is fixed, it is also preferable for appropriately securing the execution period of the post notification effect.

  In the above configuration, the entire post notification effect is not necessarily performed during the opening period, the round interval period, or the like, and a part of the post notification effect may be performed during the opening period, the round interval period, or the like. For example, if the entire post-notification effect is performed in one round interval period, as a result of the effect execution period becoming longer, the waiting time until the next round game is started also becomes longer, and the player feels delayed. There is a risk of embrace. In this regard, by distributing the post-notification effect between the round game and the interval period, it is possible to suppress the miss of the post-notification effect while suppressing the induction of the extended feeling.

  In the above case, the part that suggests the probability variation game state is performed in the opening period or interval period, and the other part is performed in the game round immediately before the opening period or in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode It is good to do. For example, in the case of the fourth notification effect C2, the display of the button operation image 408 in FIG. 29C and the display of the result video in FIG. 29D are performed in the round interval period, and FIG. ) And (b) may be performed in the previous round game. In other words, at least the portion that suggests the probability-changing gaming state that the player is most interested in may be performed using the period during which the variable winning device 32 is not open.

  (27) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, after an initial hit (a big hit that occurs in the normal gaming state) that triggers the transition to the probability-changing gaming state occurs, the normal game goes through the short-time gaming state. The period until falling to the state is the jackpot consecutive period, and information on the stop pattern is memorized for this period, but the probability change gaming state ends after the first hit that triggers the transition to the probability change gaming state occurs A period until the game is performed (falling into the short-time game state or the normal game state) may be a jackpot extended period, and information about stop patterns may be stored during this period.

  (28) In each of the above-described embodiments, the period for storing the history of the stop pattern and the period for which the history reference is made are always the same, but the latter can be configured to have a shorter period than the former. It is good. When the number of jackpot occurrences at the time of consecutive resorts increases (for example, 10 times), there is a high possibility that the player does not remember the stop pattern at the time of the initial jackpot even if the player views the stop pattern. Based on this, although 10 big hits are stored as the history of the stop pattern, the history reference is made only for the big hit of the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) just before that. That is, the number of jackpot occurrences at the time of consecutive resorts is counted, and the history reference is made only for the predetermined number of times immediately before. As a result, it is possible to reduce the change frequency of the post-notification effect while suppressing the influence on the player who has determined the probability variation gaming state from the stop pattern, and the player who has not determined the probability variation gaming state from the stop pattern It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity (uncomfortable feeling that the production is different from usual).

  (29) In the first to fourth embodiments described above, a time-short game state is assigned to any normal jackpot result. However, for example, when a 3R normal jackpot is won, the game shifts to a time-short game state. For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration that does not shift to the short-time gaming state (shifts to the normal gaming state) with a part of the normal jackpot result.

  In this case, in the grasping process of the specific state in the effect control device 82 (FIG. 22), a process of determining the jackpot type based on the type command transmitted from the main control device 81 is added upstream of step S1103. A configuration that shifts to the processing of step S1103 (set of a specific state flag) when it is determined that the jackpot type shifts to the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode ends and an ending command is received. Good. As a result, the specific state flag can be set by distinguishing between the case of shifting to the short-time gaming state and the case of not shifting.

  In addition, in the case of a configuration that does not shift to the short-time gaming state with a part of the normal jackpot result, the occurrence of the normal jackpot that does not shift to the short-time gaming state directly triggers the end of the specific state, so when a negative determination is made in step S1105, Processing for determining the jackpot type based on the type command transmitted from the main control device 81 is performed, and when it is determined that a normal jackpot that does not shift to the short-time gaming state has occurred, the processing of step S1106 (deletion of the specific state flag) It is good to have a configuration to move to.

  (30) In the second embodiment, the production operation unit 75 is not operated in the previous big hit operation effect, and the production operation unit 75 is operated in the previous big hit operation production. The second notification effect B is executed, and the fourth notification effect C2 or C3 is executed in other cases. However, the second notification effect B is compared with the latter case in the former case. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to perform B. For example, when the production operation unit 75 is not operated in the operation effect at the last big hit, and the production operation unit 75 is operated in the operation production at the last big hit, and in other cases In both cases, the second notification effect B, the fourth notification effect C2, and the fifth notification effect C3 can be executed as the subsequent notification effects. In the former case, the second notification effect B is selected more than in the latter case. A configuration in which the selection probability of each effect is set so as to be easily performed is conceivable.

  (31) In the second embodiment, the fourth notification effect C2 is provided when the effect operation unit 75 is not operated in both the previous jackpot operation effect and the previous jackpot operation effect. Alternatively, the fifth notification effect C3 is executed, but the second notification effect B may be executed. If there is a track record of not operating the production operation unit 75 in both the previous post-notification effect and the previous post-notification effect in a situation where the probability variation gaming state can be determined in advance, There is a high possibility that the player is not willing to operate the performance operation unit 75, and even if the button operation image 408 is displayed for such a player, the effectiveness is considered to be low. Therefore, the second notification effect B is executed not only when the achievement that can be regarded as a player who has been determined in advance, but also when the achievement that can be regarded as a player who does not intend to operate is recognized. Do not perform operation effects. As a result, not only the player who knows the probable game state in advance but also the player who does not intend to operate the operation unit 75 for production, the troublesome operation of the button operation image 408 and the operation unit 75 for production is reduced. And the ease of playing is improved.

  (32) In the second embodiment, the history of operation result information is stored in the operation history storage area 301, but may be stored in the stop picture history storage area 250, or a storage means different from the RAM 244. May be stored.

  (33) In the third embodiment, by operating the one variable winning device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, an opening / closing execution mode advantageous to the player and an unfavorable opening / closing execution mode are provided. However, by providing a plurality of variable winning devices having a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device, an opening / closing execution mode advantageous to a player and an unfavorable opening / closing execution mode are provided. Also good. In this case, there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the two opening / closing execution modes because the variable winning device controlled to open / close is different between the advantageous opening / closing execution mode and the disadvantageous opening / closing execution mode. Is more easily recognized by the player.

  As a configuration including a plurality of variable winning devices, the number of game balls to be paid out (the number of winning balls) when a game ball wins the first variable winning device is the first number (for example, 15), and the second variable winning device. When the number of game balls to be paid out when a game ball is won in the apparatus is set to a second number (for example, three) smaller than the first number, and the result is 15R probability variation big hit result A, the first round In the round game up to the 15th round, the first variable winning device is opened and closed. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R probability variable big hit result B, the first variable winning device is opened and closed in the round games from the first round to the sixth round. In the round games of the 7th to 15th rounds, it is possible to open and close the second variable winning device. In this case, the operation mode of the second variable winning device may be the same as that of the first variable winning device, or may be different (low frequency winning mode).

  At this time, the size (opening width) of the opening of the second variable winning device may be smaller than that of the first variable winning device. In this case, it is easy to associate advantages and disadvantages in terms of appearance, and it is suitable for appealing the opening / closing execution mode on the advantageous side. When one of the first and second variable winning devices is arranged on the other upstream side (the upstream side in the flow of game balls in the game area) and the firing handle 54 is operated with a predetermined operation amount ( When the game ball is fired at a predetermined launch intensity), it is preferable that the game ball can reach any of these variable winning devices. That is, when a game ball is fired at a launch intensity that allows a game ball to reach one of these variable winning devices, a variable prize that is controlled to open and close is configured so that the game ball can reach the other. The player does not need to change the amount of operation of the firing handle 54 when the device is switched, which is convenient.

  (34) In the fourth embodiment, the specific notification is executed after the end of the game times. However, the specific notification may be executed before the end of the game times if the display of the stop pattern is started. That is, it is sufficient that the specific notification is performed after the start of display of the stop picture. As a result, the specific notification is executed after the stop pattern is displayed, and the specific notification function of boosting the player's determination of determining the probability variation jackpot result from the stop pattern can be suitably secured. Become.

  (35) In the fourth embodiment, the light emitting unit 501 is provided and the specific notification execution location is separated from the display screen G. However, as shown in FIG. 502 may be displayed, and the specific notification may be executed in the display screen G. For example, if the period until the specific notification is executed after the display of the stop picture is relatively long (for example, 10 sec), the player emits light until the specific notification is executed in order to avoid overlooking the specific notification. However, according to the above configuration, the specific notification can be confirmed while looking at the display screen G, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience is caused. It becomes possible to suppress. At this time, the specific notification image 502 may be displayed at an end portion or an end portion of the display screen G (a portion closer to the end portion than the center portion) in order to suppress the image 502 from being noticeable. In this case, in order to suppress the visibility of the round number display 403 from being hindered, the specific notification image 502 may be displayed at a location that does not overlap with the round number display 403.

  (36) In the fourth embodiment, the specific notification is performed when the current probability variation jackpot stop pattern overlaps with the past probability variation jackpot stop pattern. However, the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result ( Even when the result is a non-probable big hit result), the specific notification may be performed under a predetermined condition. In this case, the specific notification can be executed not only in the case of the probable jackpot result but also in the case of the normal jackpot result. As a result, in order to determine the probability variation jackpot result, it is not sufficient that the specific notification is performed, and the current stop pattern is the same as the past probability variation jackpot stop pattern and the specific notification is performed. It is not until the set that the probable jackpot result is confirmed. In this case, even if a general player notices the presence of the specific notification, it becomes difficult to perceive the meaning, and it is possible to favorably secure the superiority of the player who knows the meaning of the specific notification. In addition, since the status of the stop picture is also a requirement for confirming the probability variation, it is possible to suppress the situation that it is sufficient if only the light emitting unit 501 is viewed, and it is also preferable for improving the degree of attention to the main display unit 43. In addition, as a predetermined condition, the case where the lottery process of whether to perform specific alerting | reporting is performed and it becomes a result corresponding to execution etc. can be considered.

  The specific notification execution timing when the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result does not necessarily have to be the same as the execution timing when the current probability variation jackpot stop pattern overlaps with the past probability variation jackpot stop pattern. Is optional. For example, the specific notification may be performed before the display of the stop pattern is started, or the specific notification may be performed after the normal jackpot result is suggested by the post notification effect.

  Further, instead of or in addition to the case where the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result, the configuration may be such that the specific notification can be executed when the result of the current lottery determination is out of place. Also in this case, the execution timing of the specific notification is not particularly limited and is arbitrary.

  (37) In the fourth embodiment, the specific notification is executed by switching the light emitting unit 501 from the off state to the on state. However, the light emitting unit 501 is normally set in the on state, and the light emitting unit 501 is turned off from the on state. It is good also as a structure which performs specific alerting | reporting by switching to. Alternatively, the special notification may be executed by changing the emission color from a normal color (for example, blue) to a special color (for example, red) or changing the emission luminance (brightness). Further, the number of light emitting elements in the light emitting unit 501 is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  (38) In the fourth embodiment, the light emitting unit 501 is arranged on the game board 24. However, the light emitting unit 501 may be arranged on the front door frame 14. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs specific alerting | reporting by the display light emission part 63 provided in the front door frame 14, or the operation part 75 for an effect and the launch handle 54 are equipped with a light emission part, and specific alerting | reporting is performed by the said light emission part. It is good also as a structure.

  (39) In the fourth embodiment, the specific notification is executed by visual notification. However, the specific notification is executed by auditory notification such as outputting a specific sound, or a decoration for moving effects. It is good also as a structure which performs specific alerting | reporting by the effect production using a movable body (movable accessory).

  (40) In the fourth embodiment, the post-notification effect is executed separately from the specific notification. However, the post-notification effect may be omitted. In this case, the specific notification may be executed before the transition to the probability variation gaming state.

  (41) In the fourth embodiment, when the result is a 7R probability variation jackpot result (a jackpot where it is uncertain whether the probability varies from the number of rounds), the second notification effect B in FIG. 26 can be executed as a subsequent notification effect. It is good also as a structure. In this case, the specific notification may be performed before the execution of the second notification effect B (before the start of the first round game), for example, the specific notification may be performed during the opening period.

  (42) In the fifth embodiment, when the current stop picture matches the previous stop picture, the end condition on the advantageous side is set. However, the condition for setting the end condition on the advantageous side is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the current stop pattern may match the previous stop pattern. In other words, when the same stop pattern is allocated in a big hit within a predetermined number of times (for example, within 5 times), the time-short gaming state end condition may be advantageous.

  (43) In the fifth embodiment, when the current stop picture matches the previous stop picture, the end condition on the advantageous side is set. However, the current stop picture and the previous stop picture are set. Is a predetermined combination (for example, the current stop picture is the stop picture of the stop result data C3 and the previous stop picture is the stop picture of the stop result C2). An advantageous configuration may be used. However, from the viewpoint of easy understanding by the player, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable. In other words, if the end condition is advantageous because it is a specific combination other than the above-mentioned stop pictures being matched, the player needs to know the combination pattern in advance. If it is a form, it is only necessary to compare whether or not the current stop pattern is the same as the previous stop pattern, and the player can easily understand the structure.

  In the fifth embodiment, the combination of the stop pattern of the current time and the previous stop pattern is set as the combination of stop patterns that are the end conditions on the advantageous side. Multiple stop picture combinations that serve as end conditions on the side (for example, when the current stop picture and the previous stop picture match, the current stop picture and the previous stop picture are shifted by one (this stop picture) The pattern is a stop pattern of the stop result data C1 and the previous stop pattern is a stop pattern of the stop result data C2, etc.). In this case, an advantageous end condition may be set.

  (44) In the fifth embodiment, two types of 50 times and 100 times are provided as the upper limit number of game times in which the short-time gaming state is continued, but three or more types may be provided. . For example, in the case of a configuration in which 50 times, 70 times, and 100 times are provided, the combination of the current stop pattern and the previous stop pattern is a predetermined first combination (for example, one stop pattern and the previous stop pattern is one). If the current stop pattern is a shift (the stop pattern of the stop result data C1 is the stop pattern of the stop result data C2, and the previous stop pattern is the stop pattern of the stop result data C2), the upper limit is set to 70 times. When the combination of the previous stop pattern and the previous stop pattern is a second combination different from the first combination (the current stop pattern matches the previous stop pattern), the upper limit is set to 100 times, When the combination of the stop pattern and the previous stop pattern is different from both the first combination and the second combination, the upper limit may be set to 30. In this case, each combination of the first combination and the second combination is not necessarily one combination, and may have a plurality of combinations.

  (45) In the fifth embodiment, when the upper limit number of game times in which the short-time gaming state is continued is set to 100 times, the notification image of FIG. 49 (b) is displayed and the upper limit number of times is displayed. However, the difference (+50 times) from when it is set to 50 times is taught at a time, but the difference may be taught in multiple times. In this case, this configuration may be used in combination with the configuration (44). For example, when the number of game times executed since the start of the short-time gaming state has reached 50 times, as a first notification, a predetermined roaring effect image (whether or not the short-time gaming state ends) For example, an additional (or extended) notification image of +20 times is displayed. After that, when the number of executions reaches 70 times, the above-mentioned predetermined turning effect image or a different turning effect image is displayed as the second notification. At that time, when 70 is set as the upper limit number, the end image is displayed as a result display, and when 100 is set as the upper limit number, for example, +30 is added (or extended). A notification image is displayed.

  (46) In the fifth embodiment, when a normal jackpot result is obtained during the short-time gaming state, the history stored in the stop picture history storage area 302 is referred to, and the short-time gaming state is determined based on the result. Although it is configured to set an end condition, when a normal jackpot result is obtained regardless of the gaming state, the history stored in the stop picture history storage area 302 is referred to, and the end of the short-time gaming state based on the result It is good also as a structure which sets conditions.

  (47) In the fifth embodiment, when the normal jackpot result is obtained during the short-time gaming state, the history stored in the stop picture history storage area 302 is referred to. However, during the probability changing gaming state, When a normal jackpot result is obtained, the history stored in the stop picture history storage area 302 is referred to, and the current stop picture and the previous stop picture (or a previous stop picture) are a predetermined combination. Based on the above, it may be configured to set the end condition of the short-time gaming state. With such a configuration, the player can be pleased even in situations where the player is likely to be discouraged due to the downgrading to the non-probability game state.

  (48) In the fifth embodiment, when the current stop picture matches the previous stop picture, the advantageous end condition is set. However, the disadvantageous end condition is set. It is good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game that expects that the current stop picture and the previous stop picture do not match.

  (49) In the fifth embodiment, the end condition for the short-time gaming state is set based on the history stored in the stop picture history storage area 302. However, the end condition for the probability variation gaming state and the probability variation It is good also as a structure which sets the completion | finish condition of high frequency support mode at the time of transfering to a gaming state. For example, when the game state has transitioned to the probability variation game state, the probability variation game state will be terminated when the number of executions of the game times after the transition to the probability variation game state reaches the upper limit number, and this stop picture If the pattern does not match the previous stop pattern, the upper limit number is set to the first upper limit number (for example, 50 times). If the patterns match, the second upper limit number is larger than the first upper limit number. It is good also as a structure (for example, 100 times). In addition, the upper limit number of times that the high probability mode when the game state is changed to the probability variation game state is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) or left to the current jackpot type distribution result, and then the current stop When the pattern does not match the previous stop pattern, the upper limit number of times of the high frequency support mode is set to the first upper limit number (for example, 50 times), and when the patterns match, the upper limit number of times is higher than the first upper limit number of times. It is good also as a structure made into many 2nd upper limit frequency | counts (for example, 100 times). In addition, when the current stop pattern and the previous stop pattern match, even if the current stop pattern corresponds to the normal jackpot result, after the end of the open / close execution mode, the configuration changes to the probability variation gaming state Also good.

  (50) In the fifth embodiment, in the case where the history of the jackpot stop pattern is stored regardless of whether it is probable or non-probable, the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result. If the history of probability change continues for a predetermined number of times, or if the history of non-probability change is larger than the probability change in the jackpot within the predetermined number of times, the time-saving gaming state end condition is more advantageous to the player than otherwise It is good also as a structure made into something. Also, when the jackpot result this time is a probable jackpot result, if the history of non-probability has continued a predetermined number of times, or if there is more non-probability history than the probability change in the jackpot within the predetermined number of times It is good also as a structure which makes the completion | finish condition of the high probability mode in the probability variation game state and the high frequency support mode more advantageous than the case where it is not.

  (51) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Furthermore, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of the reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to game machines in which and are fused.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  In addition, the invention described in each of the following features is “when a game machine such as a pachinko machine performs a transition determination such as a lottery determination or the like when a predetermined condition is established, and determines that the result is a transition response result. In addition, there is known a technique for shifting to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (see, for example, JP-A-2005-074175). The invention which raises the attention degree to a game is desired. "

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
Special gaming state transition means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result Function to execute)
A result display means (main display unit 43) capable of performing a transition response result display (display of a stop picture for jackpot) corresponding to the result of the transition determination being the transition response result;
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low (probability changing gaming state in the first to second embodiments, the first 15R probability variation jackpot result A) in the third embodiment and second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments), 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment ) And multiple gaming states,
When the transition determination result is the transition response result and the gaming state after the special gaming state or the special gaming state is the first gaming state, a plurality of types of display modes (first to second) Which of the stop result data B1 to B10 in the embodiment of the display of the stop pattern display, the display of the stop pattern of the stop result data A1, A2 in the third embodiment) is displayed as the transition corresponding result display A mode determining means for determining (a function for executing a stop result setting process for probability variation big hits by the main control device 81);
When the transition determination result is the transition response result and the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state, the effect is specified by the rendering means (symbol display device 41). Effect control means for controlling the effect to be executed (function of executing effect control processing by the effect control device 82);
With
The specific effect is an indication that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state after the result display means starts displaying the transition correspondence result display. What to do,
The specific effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, sixth notification effect C4, eighth notification effect D2, ninth notification effect D3, tenth notification effect). Notification effect D4) is set,
A history of information (stop picture information for probability variation big hit) displayed on the result display means is stored in a predetermined storage means (stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 in the effect control device 82). Storage processing execution means (function to execute the process of step S1205 by the effect control device 82) for executing the process;
The effect control means, when the specific effect is executed by the effect means, based on the history in the predetermined storage means and information on the current transition correspondence result display, A game machine comprising an effect determining means for determining which one of them to be executed (a function for executing an effect determining process for 7R probability change and an effect determining process for 15R jackpot A by the effect control device 82).

  In the above configuration, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. It is suggested. However, for example, when the transition to the first gaming state has occurred in the past, and the same result display as the transition corresponding result display at that time is performed again, depending on the player, the player enters the first gaming state by a specific effect. It is conceivable that the transition to the first gaming state is discriminated from the comparison between the current result display and the past result display before suggesting the transition. In such a case, it is not preferable that the specific effect in the same manner as before is repeated in order to suppress the tiredness to the effect and the reduction in attention. In this regard, in this feature, a history of information related to the transition correspondence result display is stored, and an effect mode of the specific effect is determined based on the history and information related to the current transition correspondence result display. That is, since the mode of the specific effect is changed based on the results of the display of the transition correspondence result, it is possible to suppress the repetition of the specific effect of the same mode in a situation where the first gaming state can be determined before the suggestion by the specific effect. . Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably suppress the tiredness to the production and the reduction in attention.

  In the feature A1, the first gaming state or the second gaming state may be different from the normal gaming state or may be the normal gaming state.

Feature A2. The plurality of types of effect modes include a first effect mode (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, sixth notification effect C4, and tenth notification effect D4) different from the first effect mode. Production modes (fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, eighth notification effect D2, ninth notification effect D3) are included,
The effect determining means performs the specific effect of the first effect mode when the history in the predetermined storage means is the first history (when a history of the same stop picture as the current stop picture exists). When the history is a second history different from the first history (when there is no history of the same stop pattern as the current stop pattern), the specific effect of the second effect mode is performed. Or, when the history is the first history, the specific effect of the first effect mode is more easily performed than the second effect mode, compared to the case where the history is the second history. As described above, the gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the aspect of the specific effect is determined.

  In the above configuration, at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode are set as the effect mode of the specific effect, and the specific effect of the first effect mode is executed according to the stored history status, A specific effect of one effect mode is likely to be executed. Thereby, based on the results of the transition correspondence result display, it is possible to properly use the effect mode of the specific effect, and it is preferable that the specific effect of the same mode is repeated when the first gaming state can be determined from the comparison of the result displays. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature A3. The first history is the same as the information related to the current transition correspondence result display in the history before the current time stored in the predetermined storage means or the history in the predetermined time period in the predetermined storage means. Is included,
The second history does not include the same information as the current transition correspondence result display in the history before the current time stored in the predetermined storage means or the history of the predetermined time period. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein there is a gaming machine.

  When the same display mode as the past transition correspondence result display is displayed as the transition correspondence result display this time, the first is shown before the player suggests a specific effect from the comparison with the past transition correspondence result display. Easy to determine the transition to the gaming state. In such a situation, the configuration of the feature A2 can favorably exhibit the effect.

Feature A4. The plurality of types of effect modes include a first effect mode (second notification effect B, tenth notification effect D4) and a second effect mode (fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification) different from the first effect mode. Production C3, 8th announcement production D2, 9th announcement production D3),
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the first effect mode is the suggestion earlier than the second effect mode.

  In the said structure, the 2nd production | presentation aspect and the 1st production | generation aspect in which an indication is performed earlier than the 2nd production | presentation aspect are contained in the production | presentation aspect executable as a specific production | presentation. This makes it possible to change the timing suggesting the transition to the first gaming state in accordance with the relationship between the past results of the transition response result display and the current transition response result display. For example, in a situation where the player can determine from the transition response result display that the game state is the first game state, it is possible to take action such as making suggestions earlier than in the case where the player does not know, so that a player who already knows the result It can suppress feeling that a specific production is troublesome. In addition, by making the suggestion early, it is possible to create a free time for the production. For example, a special production (a third production different from the first production and the second production) is performed using the idle time. In this case, the effect of increasing the production attention can be expected.

Feature A5. The plurality of types of effects include a first effect (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, sixth notification effect C4, eighth notification effect D2, tenth notification effect D4) and the first effect. 2nd production mode (5th information production C3, 9th information production D3) different from a mode is included,
In the second effect mode, after an effect suggesting the second gaming state (display of a pseudo result image of FIG. 30A) is performed, an effect suggesting the first gaming state (FIG. 30B). Display the resulting video)
In the first effect mode, an effect suggesting the first gaming state without executing an effect suggesting the second gaming state (display of the image of FIG. 26A, FIG. 29D, FIG. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, which executes (display of a result image of b3).

  In the configuration described above, the second effect mode that suggests the first game state after the appearance as if in the second game state is included in the effect modes that can be executed as the specific effect. In this way, the presence of an effect mode that suggests the true result after pretending to be the opposite result can invite the player's surprise and excite the suggestion effect. However, if the player knows in advance that the game state is the first gaming state, such appearance may be troublesome, and there is a risk that the effect of the presentation will be reduced. In this regard, in this feature, the first effect mode that suggests the first game state without executing the effect that suggests the second game state is further included in the effect modes that can be executed as the specific effect. This makes it possible to vary whether or not to pretend to the second gaming state depending on the relationship between the past results of the transition response result display and the current transition response result display. For example, in a situation where the player can determine from the transition correspondence result display that the player is in the first gaming state, it is possible to take a countermeasure such as not pretending to be the second gaming state, and the game already knows the result. It can suppress that a person feels annoying the appearance.

Feature A6. An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
Notification executing means (a function for executing the display of the image shown in FIG. 29C by the effect control device 82) for executing a predetermined notification for prompting the operation of the operation means;
With
The plurality of types of effect modes include a first effect mode (second notification effect B, sixth notification effect C4, tenth notification effect D4) and a second effect mode (fourth notification) different from the first effect mode. Production C2, fifth notification production C3, eighth notification production D2, and ninth notification production D3),
The second effect mode is to execute the predetermined notification, and to make the suggestion when an operation of the operation unit is detected by the operation detection unit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the first effect mode is the suggestion without executing the predetermined notification.

  In the above-described configuration, a second effect mode is included in the effect modes that can be executed as the specific effect, in which a predetermined notification for prompting the operation of the operation unit is executed and the first game state is suggested when the operation unit is operated. ing. By interposing the operation of the operation means in this way, the player can have a real feeling of participating in the game, and the suggestive effect can be raised. However, when the player knows in advance that the game state is the first gaming state, the player can predict the development of effects after operating the operation means, so that a predetermined notification or operation means for prompting the operation is provided. The act of operating may be troublesome, and on the contrary, there is a risk that the production effect will be reduced. In this regard, in this feature, the first effect mode that suggests the first gaming state without executing the predetermined notification is further included in the effect modes that can be executed as the specific effect. This makes it possible to vary whether or not to perform the predetermined notification according to the relationship between the past results of the transition response result display and the current transition response result display. For example, in a situation where the player can determine from the transition response result display that the game state is the first gaming state, it is possible to respond such as not performing a predetermined notification, and a player who already knows the result can perform a predetermined notification or It is possible to suppress annoying operation of the operation means.

Feature A7. The storage processing execution means
Storage processing start means (function for executing the processing of steps S1203 to S1205 by the effect control device 82) for starting the storage processing of the history when a predetermined start condition set in advance is satisfied;
Storage process ending means for ending the storage process started by the storage process starting means when a predetermined predetermined end condition is satisfied (function for executing the processing of steps S1105 to S1106 by the effect control device 82) When,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, comprising:

  In the above configuration, the transition correspondence result display history stored in the predetermined storage unit is limited to a certain period (a certain range). In this case, for example, the specific effect is influenced by the previous transition response result display that is difficult for the player to remember realistically or the transition response result display selected when the previous player played. It can suppress that the production | presentation aspect changes. Further, compared to the case where a history is stored every time a migration response result is obtained, the amount of use in the storage means can be saved, and the processing load of the storage process can be reduced.

Feature A8. In a predetermined case (when a jackpot result for shifting to a probability-changing gaming state or a short-time gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is completed), the determination result of the transition determination becomes the transition corresponding result after the special gaming state is ended. A first state (probability mode) in which the probability is higher than the normal gaming state, and a second state (high frequency support mode) in which the establishment frequency of the condition per unit period is likely to be higher than the normal gaming state. Provided with a second gaming state transition means (a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a specific gaming state that is at least one state;
The storage process starting means starts the storage process when the transition response result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state is reached in a situation where the storage process is not started. The gaming machine according to Feature A7.

  In the first state or the second state, the period until the transition response result occurs is likely to be shortened, so that the player can easily remember the transition response result displayed in the past. Thereby, it is possible to switch the effect mode of the specific effect for the results of the transition correspondence result display within the range that the player can keep in memory, and this is a practically preferable mode in the configuration of the feature A7. be able to.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the storage process ending means ends the storage process when shifting to the normal gaming state in a state where the storage process is started.

  In the above configuration, when the history is stored, the transition to the normal gaming state is made after the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state (the state that becomes at least one of the first state and the second state). It is limited to the period until it is demoted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the production from changing according to the game result of the previous player or affecting the mode of selection of the production when the next player plays the game. That is, the first state and the second state are advantageous for the player, and while the player is in that state, it is difficult for the player to stop the game, and the player is unlikely to change. For this reason, by setting it as the structure of this characteristic, it can be set as the structure from which an effect changes according to the log | history condition of a transition response result display in the same player (one player).

  Feature A10. The storage process execution means deletes the history stored in the predetermined storage means when the storage process is ended by the storage process end means (the process of step S1107 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A7 to A9, characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, since the history stored in the predetermined storage unit is deleted when the storage process is completed, only the history for the target period exists in the predetermined storage unit. For example, in the configuration in which the history remains, processing for managing when each history is necessary (for example, storing the date and time of the history) is required. According to this configuration, such processing is performed. Is no longer necessary. For this reason, it is possible to manage the history with a simple configuration and reduce the processing load of history management. In addition, since unnecessary histories are sequentially deleted, it is possible to contribute to saving of usage in a predetermined storage means.

Feature A11. The effect determining means includes grasping means (function to execute the process of step S1404 by the effect control device 82) for grasping the history in the predetermined storage means, and the grasping result of the grasping means and the current transition correspondence Based on the information related to the result display, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined,
The grasping unit is configured such that when the information on the transition correspondence result display this time is information on the transition correspondence result display corresponding to the first gaming state (information on the stop pattern corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result) or the first game It is to grasp the history when it is information related to the specific transition response result display (information on the stop pattern corresponding to the 7R probability variation jackpot result) among the information regarding the transition response result display corresponding to the state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10.

  According to the above configuration, when the information related to the current transition response result display is information corresponding to the first gaming state, or when the information is related to the specific transition response result display, the history grasping process and the information The effect mode determination process is executed. That is, since the history grasping process or the like is performed in a limited state, the execution frequency of each process can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load required for such processing as compared to a case where the grasping processing or the like is performed at a high frequency such as each time it is a migration response result.

Feature A12. An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
Notification executing means (a function for executing the display of the image shown in FIG. 29C by the effect control device 82) for executing a predetermined notification for prompting the operation of the operation means;
With
As one aspect of the specific effect, executing the predetermined notification and executing an operation presence effect (fourth notification effect C2) for performing the suggestion when an operation of the operation unit is detected by the operation detection unit. Is possible,
A process of storing an operation history of the operation unit when the operation presence effect is executed based on a detection result of the operation detection unit in the predetermined storage unit or a second storage unit different from the predetermined storage unit Operation history storage processing execution means (function to execute the effect processing for the round by the effect control device 82),
The effect determination means is based on the history in the predetermined storage means, information on the current transition correspondence result display, and the operation history in the predetermined storage means or the second storage means. The game according to any one of features A1 to A11, which determines which one of the production modes is to be executed (function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2106 by the production control device 82). Machine.

  Although it is possible to determine the transition to the first game state from the comparison between the past transition response result display and the current transition response result display, a player who has not been determined or is not interested in the determination and has not performed the determination. It is also assumed that Under such circumstances, the present feature is configured such that the production mode of the specific effect is determined in consideration of the operation history of the operation means. Thereby, the gaming machine can determine whether or not the player has actually discriminated the first gaming state from the player's operation results, and the effect can be changed based on the determination. As a result, for example, only when there is a high possibility that the player is actually discriminating, an operation in which the specific effect is changed becomes possible, and a game for which the discriminating function for the player is not discriminated It is possible to suitably suppress an influence on a person's game.

Feature A13. The plurality of types of effect modes include a first effect mode (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, sixth notification effect C4, and tenth notification effect D4) different from the first effect mode. Production modes (fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, eighth notification effect D2, ninth notification effect D3) are included,
In the case where the history of information relating to the display of the transition correspondence result is a predetermined history (history situation where a history of the same stop pattern as the current stop pattern exists) and the operation history is the first operation history In addition, when the specific effect of the first effect mode is performed, the history is the predetermined history, and the operation history is a second operation history different from the first operation history, the second effect mode. Or when the history is the predetermined history and the operation history is the first operation history, the history is the predetermined history and the operation history is the Compared to the case of the second operation history, the effect mode of the specific effect is determined so that the specific effect of the first effect mode is more easily performed than the second effect mode. Do The gaming machine according to symptoms A12.

  According to the said structure, even if the log | history of the information regarding a transfer corresponding | compatible result display is the same, the production | presentation aspect of a specific effect changes with the conditions of the operation log | history regarding operation of an operation means. Thereby, even in a situation where the transition from the transition response result display to the first gaming state can be determined, the player who has actually determined that and the player who is not so discriminate the effect mode of the specific effect Can be Therefore, the player who has previously determined the transition to the first gaming state is prevented from feeling annoying the specific effect, and the player does not have the function for such a player previously determined the first gaming state. It is possible to suppress the influence on the game.

Feature A14. The predetermined history is the same display mode as the current transition response result display and is displayed before the current time in a situation where the current transition response result display corresponds to the first gaming state. 1 transition correspondence result display (previous stoppage pattern for probability variation jackpot whose display mode is the same as the current stop pattern), the same display mode as the current transition response result display, and the first transition response result Information related to the second transition corresponding result displayed before the display (the previous stop pattern for the probability variation big hit whose display mode is the same as the current stop pattern) is stored in the predetermined storage means. It is a history corresponding to that,
The first operation history is obtained when the operation means is not operated in the presence-of-operation effect when the first transition response result is displayed, and when the second transition response result is displayed. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein the gaming machine has a history corresponding to the operation means being operated in an effect with operation.

  In the above configuration, the operating means is not operated in the past operation-provided effect in a situation where the first gaming state can be determined in advance, while the operating means is operated in the previous operation-provided effect. When there is a track record, the player operated the operating means according to the predetermined notification in the previous operation with the operation, but in the later operation with the operation, the player had previously grasped the first gaming state. It is presumed that the operating means has not been operated even when the predetermined notification is given. In such a case, it is considered that the player has determined the first gaming state in advance, and the specific effect of the first effect mode is executed or easily executed. That is, in this feature, when there is a situation in the past where it is possible to determine the transition from the comparison of the result displays to the first gaming state, by referring to the operation status of the operating means at that time, the player Is actually determined in advance whether or not the transition to the first gaming state has been preliminarily determined, and the result is reflected in the selection of effects in the current specific effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not the player knows in advance the transition to the first gaming state, and suitably switch the effect mode according to the actual determination status of the player. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature A15. The second operation history is the operation when the operation means is operated in the operation presence effect when the first transition response result is displayed, and when the second transition response result is displayed. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, wherein the gaming machine is a history corresponding to the operation means being operated in a presence effect.

  In the above configuration, when there is a track record of operating the operation means in both the past operation presence effect and the previous operation presence effect in a situation where the first gaming state can be determined in advance. The first game state is regarded as a player who has not been discriminated in advance, and the specific effect of the second effect mode is executed or easily executed. As a result, when it is highly likely that the player has not determined the transition to the first gaming state in advance, it is possible to suppress the execution of the specific effect for the player that has been determined in advance. It is possible to suppress the influence on the game of a player whose function for a certain player has not been discriminated in advance.

Feature A16. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
Special gaming state transition means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result Function to execute)
A result display means (main display unit 43) capable of performing a transition response result display (display of a stop picture for jackpot) corresponding to the result of the transition determination being the transition response result;
When the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, a plurality of types of display modes (display of stop patterns of stop result data B1 to B10 in the first and second embodiments, in the third embodiment) Mode determining means (a function for executing a stop result setting process for probability variation big hits by the main control device 81) for determining which of the stop result data A is displayed as the transition corresponding result display;
The history of the information on the transition correspondence result display displayed on the result display means (stop picture information for probability variation big hit) is stored in a predetermined storage means (stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 in the effect control device 82). Storage processing execution means for executing the processing (function for executing the processing of step S1205 by the effect control device 82);
Effect control means (function for executing effect control processing by the effect control device 82) for controlling the effect means (the symbol display device 41) to perform a specific effect;
With
The specific effect includes a plurality of types of effect modes (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, sixth notification effect C4, eighth notification effect D2, ninth notification effect D3, tenth notification effect). Notification effect D4) is set,
The effect control means, when the specific effect is executed by the effect means, based on the history in the predetermined storage means and information on the current transition correspondence result display, A game machine comprising an effect determining means for determining which one of them to be executed (a function for executing an effect determining process for 7R probability change and an effect determining process for 15R jackpot A by the effect control device 82).

  In the above configuration, the display mode of the transition response result display for notifying that the result is the transition response result is selected from a plurality of types, and the history of the selection result is stored in a predetermined storage unit. Then, based on the history of information related to the transition correspondence result display and the information related to the current transition correspondence result display, the effect mode of the specific effect executed by the effect means is determined. With this configuration, the selection history of the display mode in the transition response result display functions as one of the elements that change the content of the specific effect, and what transition response result display the player has played in the previous game It is reflected in the selection result of the production mode. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the enjoyment of what transition response result display is displayed while diversifying the production selection.

  Each configuration described in any of the features A1 to A15 may be applied to this feature. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A16, the configuration is any one of the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E3, the features F1 to F11, and the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
Special gaming state transition means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result Function to execute)
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low (probability changing gaming state in the first to second embodiments, the first 15R probability variation jackpot result A) in the third embodiment and second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments), 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment ) And multiple gaming states,
Production means (symbol display device 41) capable of producing the production;
When the result of the transition determination is the transition response result, a specific effect (first notification effect A, second notification effect B, which suggests the game state after the special game state or the special game state ends) The third notification effect C1, the fourth notification effect C2, the fifth notification effect C3, the sixth notification effect C4, the seventh notification effect D1, the eighth notification effect D2, the ninth notification effect D3, and the tenth notification effect D4) are described above. Effect control means (function to execute the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode by the effect control device 82) that is controlled to be performed by the effect means;
With
The specific effect includes a first effect (fourth notification effect C2, eighth notification effect D2) that suggests the first gaming state, and a second effect (third notification effect C1) that suggests the second gaming state. The first game state is suggested and selected from a plurality of types of effects including a third effect (fifth notification effect C3, ninth notification effect D3) performed after execution of the second effect. Is to be executed,
The effect control means is configured such that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state, and the player makes the first game state before the suggestion is performed by the specific effect. Limiting means for restricting the execution of the third effect as the specific effect (7R probability changing effect determination process by the effect control device 82, 15 jackpot A effect determination) A gaming machine having a function of executing processing).

  In the above configuration, the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state has the first gaming state and the second gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low, and the transition determination When the result is a transition response result, a specific effect that suggests a special gaming state or a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is executed. In such a configuration, when the player is strongly interested in whether the first game state or the second game state is taught by the specific effect, in order to suggest the first game state, the execution of the first effect is performed. In addition to the case where the suggestion is performed, the case where the suggestion is performed by executing the third effect after the execution of the second effect is set, and the effects are diversified. Especially in the latter production, the first gaming state is suggested revivally after pretending to be the second gaming state, so the player's surprise and joy when the first gaming state is suggested Is increased and interest is enhanced.

  However, when the special gaming state or the subsequent gaming state is the first gaming state, the player knows that the player is in the first gaming state before the first gaming state is suggested by the specific effect. However, the appearance of the second gaming state may be troublesome, and there is a risk that the effect of the presentation will be reduced. In this regard, this feature is configured to restrict the execution of the third effect when the player is in a predetermined situation in which it can be determined in advance that the player is in the first gaming state. Thereby, the troublesomeness of the player for the appearance of the second gaming state can be reduced, and the ease of gaming is improved.

  Note that “restrict the execution of the third effect” in the feature B1 described above is not to prevent the third effect from being executed in a predetermined situation, but is not in a predetermined situation in a predetermined situation. Compared to (when the player cannot determine the transition to the first gaming state before suggesting the specific effect), the third effect is less likely to be executed. In the feature B1, the first gaming state or the second gaming state may be different from the normal gaming state or may be the normal gaming state.

Feature B2. In each of the case where the first effect is executed and the case where the second effect is executed, the effect control means performs a predetermined prior effect (see FIGS. 29A and 29B) before executing each effect. Means for executing the display of the video shown in FIG. 27 and the display of the video shown in FIGS.
The restricting means is means for restricting execution of the preliminary effect in the predetermined situation (from step S1401 to step S1409 and step S1401 from YES to step S2503 by the effect control device 82) The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising:

  In the above configuration, when the player is in a predetermined situation where it can be determined that the player is in the first game state before the first game state is suggested by the specific effect, the prior effect is also executed in addition to the third effect. The configuration is limited. As a result, the first gaming state is suggested more simply under the predetermined situation, and the annoyance when the player knows in advance that the player is in the first gaming state is further reduced. Is possible.

  Feature B3. The performance control means suggests the first gaming state as the specific performance is different from the first performance or the first performance when execution of the third performance is restricted by the restriction device. Means for executing the fourth effect (second notification effect B, tenth notification effect D4) (function of executing the processing from step S1401 to step S1409 and step S1401 from step S1401 to step S2503 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, which is provided.

  Although it is a situation in which it can be determined in advance that the game state is the first gaming state, it is assumed that there is a player who has not been determined or who is not interested in the determination and has not performed the determination. Under such circumstances, in this feature, even when execution of the third effect is restricted, the suggestion of the first gaming state itself is performed by the first effect or the fourth effect. This eliminates the inconvenience that a player who has not previously determined that the game state is the first game state must play a game without knowing the game state, and a configuration that also takes into account a player who has not determined the game state And can. Note that even the player who is making a determination has the merit that a sense of security can be obtained by suggesting the first gaming state because the determination is merely self-determination. Therefore, the configuration of this feature is more beneficial for the discriminating player than the configuration in which the first gaming state is not suggested.

Feature B4. When the execution of the third effect is restricted by the restricting means, the effect control means executes the fourth effect as the specific effect, or the fourth effect is executed more than the first effect. It is easy to be done,
The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the fourth effect is the suggestion earlier than the first effect.

  According to the above configuration, when the execution of the third effect is restricted, the first game state is notified or becomes easier to be notified than when the first effect is executed. It is possible to make the game easier for a player who knows a certain thing in advance. In addition, by making the suggestion early, it is possible to create a free time for the production. For example, a special production (fifth production different from the first production to the fourth production) is performed using the idle time. In this case, the effect of increasing the production attention can be expected. In other words, in a configuration in which both the discriminating player and the discriminating player are considered, a gaming machine that is more convenient for the former player can be obtained.

Feature B5. Storage processing execution means (steps by the effect control device 82) for executing processing for storing the history of information (game stop information) related to the game result in a predetermined storage means (the stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 in the effect control device 82). The function of executing the processing of S1205),
Situation determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined situation is based on the history stored in the predetermined storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S1402 to S1404 by the effect control device 82);
With
The restriction means restricts the execution of the third effect as the specific effect when the situation determination unit determines that the predetermined situation is set. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  Before the first game state is suggested by the specific effect that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state by comparing the current game result with the past game result There may be a predetermined situation that the player can discriminate. Under such circumstances, in the present configuration, a history of information related to game results is stored, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined situation is based on the stored results. Thereby, it can be appropriately determined in the gaming machine whether or not it is a predetermined situation, and it is possible to satisfactorily switch whether or not to restrict the execution of the third effect.

Feature B6. It includes a result display means (main display unit 43) capable of performing a transition response result display (display of stop picture for jackpot) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition response result,
The specific effect is to make the suggestion after the display of the transition correspondence result display,
Memory for executing processing for storing a history of information (stop result information) related to the transition correspondence result displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (stopped picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 in the effect control device 82). Processing execution means (function to execute the processing of step S1205 by the production control device 82),
The restricting means is configured to specify the identification when the history in the predetermined storage means is a predetermined history corresponding to the predetermined situation (when the current stop picture is the same as the stop picture at the time of the previous normal jackpot result). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that execution of the third effect is limited as an effect.

  In the production, the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is notified to the player by a specific production. Depending on the player, this transition correspondence result display and past transition correspondence result display may be displayed. In contrast, it may be determined that the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state before suggesting the first gaming state by the specific effect. Under such circumstances, the present configuration stores a history of information related to the display of the transition response result, and the third status is obtained when the history status is a predetermined history corresponding to a predetermined situation in which the first gaming state can be determined. It is the structure which restricts execution of production. Thereby, it becomes possible to satisfactorily switch whether or not to limit the execution of the third effect.

Feature B7. Probability that the result of the transition determination will be the transition corresponding result after the special gaming state is finished in a predetermined case (when the jackpot result is the transition to the probability variation gaming state or the short-time gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode is finished) At least a first state (high probability mode) in which the game state is higher than the normal gaming state, and a second state (high frequency support mode) in which the establishment frequency of the condition per unit period is likely to be higher than the normal gaming state. A specific game state transition means (a function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81) for shifting to a specific game state to be in one state,
The storage processing execution means is means for starting the storage of the history when the storage correspondence result corresponding to the transition to the specific gaming state is obtained in a situation where the storage of the history is not started (effect control device) 82. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, further comprising a function of executing the processing of Step S1203 to Step S1205 according to 82.

  In the first state or the second state, the period until the transition response result occurs is likely to be shortened, so that the player can easily remember the transition response result displayed in the past. For this reason, by adopting the structure of this feature, the transition correspondence result display transition within the range that the player can keep in memory (what transition correspondence result display has been displayed so far) It can be set as the structure by which switching of whether execution of an effect is restrict | limited is performed.

Feature B8. The storage processing execution means
A storage ending unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S1105 to S1106 by the effect control device 82) for ending the storage of the history when a predetermined predetermined end condition is satisfied;
A history erasure unit (a function of executing the processing of step S1107 by the effect control device 82) for erasing the history stored in the predetermined storage unit when the storage of the history is terminated by the storage end unit;
A gaming machine according to Feature B6 or B7, characterized by comprising:

  According to the above configuration, since the history stored in the predetermined storage unit is deleted when the storage process is completed, only the history for the target period exists in the predetermined storage unit. For example, in the configuration in which the history remains, processing for managing when each history is necessary (for example, storing the date and time of the history) is required. According to this configuration, such processing is performed. Is no longer necessary. For this reason, it is possible to manage the history with a simple configuration and reduce the processing load of history management. In addition, since unnecessary histories are sequentially deleted, it is possible to contribute to saving of usage in a predetermined storage means.

Feature B9. The production means includes a production unit (display screen G) capable of performing the specific production,
The result display means includes a display unit (first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) capable of performing the transition correspondence result display and formed smaller than the effect unit. A gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B8.

  In the said structure, the display part in which a transition corresponding | compatible result display is displayed is formed smaller than the production | presentation part in an effect means, and it is hard to stand out from a player. By adopting such a configuration, it is suppressed that the transition response result display naturally enters the eyes of the player, and a player who wants to enjoy a specific effect without knowing the transition response result display displayed on the display unit, It is possible to prevent the migration response result display from being easily viewed. In other words, whether or not to view the transition correspondence result display can be easily switched according to the player's intention, and the configuration can be made in consideration of both the player who wants to make a prior discrimination and the player who does not want to make a prior discrimination.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

  In the above configuration, the first gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the fact that the first gaming state is known in advance means that the first gaming state is advantageous. You will know. In such a case, the player is already pleased when the advantageous state has been determined in advance even though the advantageous state (first gaming state) has not yet been suggested by the specific performance. Is assumed. Under such circumstances, the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B10 described above can prevent water from being poured into the joy of the player due to the appearance of the second gaming state.

Feature B11. The gaming state after the end of the special gaming state has a plurality of gaming states including the first gaming state (probability changing gaming state in the first embodiment) and the second gaming state (short-time gaming state). And
The effect control means includes means for executing the specific effect during the execution of the special gaming state (function of executing the effect processing for the opening / closing execution mode by the effect control device 82 in the first to second embodiments). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10, wherein:

  In the above configuration, since the specific effect is performed in the special game state, it is possible to appropriately secure the execution period of the specific effect before the transition to the first game state. Thereby, it is possible to suitably suppress the inconvenience that a player who does not know in advance that the game state is the first game state must play the first game state without knowing the game state.

Feature B12. The special game state includes a first special game state (round games of the first to sixth rounds in the third embodiment) and a second special game state (after the execution of the first special game state ( 7th round to 15th round game)
As the second special gaming state, the first gaming state (the round game of the 7th to 15th rounds executed in the high-frequency winning mode in the 15R probability variation jackpot result A) and the second gaming state (the 15R probability variation jackpot result B) And a plurality of gaming states including the seventh to fifteenth round games executed in the low-frequency winning mode in
The effect control means includes means for executing the specific effect during execution of the first special gaming state (function for executing effect processing for opening / closing execution mode in the third embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

  In the above configuration, the special game state is configured to include the first special game state and the second special game state, and the first special game state includes the first game state and the second game state. Yes. Under such a configuration, since the specific effect is performed in the first special game state, it is possible to appropriately secure the execution period of the specific effect before the transition to the second special game state. become. Accordingly, even when a player who has not previously grasped the first gaming state is playing, the transition to the second special gaming state after the first gaming state is grasped (the first gaming state and the second gaming state). (Sorting with the state).

Feature B13. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
Special gaming state transition means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result Function to execute)
Production means (symbol display device 41) capable of producing the production;
A specific effect (first notification effect A, second notification effect B, third notification effect C1, fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, sixth notification effect C4, seventh notification effect D1, Effect control means (function for executing effect determination processing for opening / closing execution mode by the effect control device 82) for performing control so that the eighth notification effect D2, the ninth notification effect D3, and the tenth notification effect D4) are executed;
With
The specific effect is an indication of the gaming state after the specific effect is executed,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high (probability gaming state in the first and second embodiments, 15R probability variation big hit result A in the third embodiment) ) And the second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments, 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment) are set. And
The specific effect includes a first effect (fourth notification effect C2, eighth notification effect D2) that suggests the first gaming state, and a second effect (third notification effect C1) that suggests the second gaming state. The first game state is suggested and selected from a plurality of types of effects including a third effect (fifth notification effect C3, ninth notification effect D3) performed after execution of the second effect. Is to be executed,
In a predetermined situation in which the effect control means can determine that the player is in the first game state before the suggestion is made by the specific effect when the first game state is entered after execution of the specific effect. In some cases, there is provided a limiting means for restricting the execution of the third effect as the specific effect (a function for executing the effect determination process for 7R probability change and the effect determination process for 15 big hits A by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine characterized by

  In the above-described configuration, the game state has the first game state and the second game state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high, and the specific effect indicates which of these game states is to be achieved. Suggested in advance. In such a configuration, when the player is strongly interested in whether the first game state or the second game state is taught by the specific effect, in order to suggest the first game state, the execution of the first effect is performed. In addition to the case where the suggestion is performed, the case where the suggestion is performed by executing the third effect after the execution of the second effect is set, and the effects are diversified. Especially in the latter production, the first gaming state is suggested revivally after pretending to be the second gaming state, so the player's surprise and joy when the first gaming state is suggested Is increased and interest is enhanced.

  However, in the case of entering the first gaming state after execution of the specific effect, if the player knows that the player enters the first gaming state before the first gaming state is suggested by the specific effect, The appearance to the 2 game state may become troublesome, and on the contrary, there is a possibility that the effect of the presentation is lowered. In this regard, this feature is configured to restrict the execution of the third effect when the player is in a predetermined situation in which it can be determined in advance that the player is in the first gaming state. Thereby, the troublesomeness of the player for the appearance of the second gaming state can be reduced, and the ease of gaming is improved.

  Note that “restrict the execution of the third effect” in the feature B13 is not to execute the third effect in a predetermined situation, but in the case of a predetermined situation and not a predetermined situation. Compared to (when the player cannot determine the transition to the first gaming state before suggesting the specific effect), the third effect is less likely to be executed. In the feature B13, the first gaming state or the second gaming state may be different from the normal gaming state, or may be a normal gaming state.

  Each configuration described in any of the features B1 to B12 may be applied to this feature. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B13, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A16, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E3, the features F1 to F11, and the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
Special gaming state transition means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result Function to execute)
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low (probability changing gaming state in the first to second embodiments, the first 15R probability variation jackpot result A) in the third embodiment and second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments), 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment ) And multiple gaming states,
Production means (symbol display device 41) capable of producing the production;
A specific effect (first notification effect A, second notification effect B, third notification effect C1, second effect) that suggests that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state. 4 notification effects C2, 5th notification effects C3, 6th notification effects C4, 7th notification effects D1, 8th notification effects D2, 9th notification effects D3, 10th notification effects D4) are performed by the effect means. Effect control means (function to execute effect determination processing for opening and closing execution mode by the effect control device 82),
An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
Notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (button operation image 408) for prompting the operation of the operation means (a function for executing the 7R probability changing effect determination process by the effect control device 82);
With
The specific effect is the first effect (the fourth notification effect C2, the fifth notification effect C3, the eighth notification) that performs the predetermined notification and performs the suggestion when the operation detection unit detects an operation of the operation unit. A plurality of notification effects D2 and ninth notification effects D3) and a second effect (second notification effect B, sixth notification effect C4, and tenth notification effect D4) for performing the suggestion without executing the predetermined notification. It is selected from various types of performances and executed.
The effect control means is configured such that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state, and the player makes the first game state before the suggestion is performed by the specific effect. Limiting means for restricting execution of the first effect as the specific effect (YES in step S1401 to step S1409, YES in step S1401 by the effect control device 82). A gaming machine having a function of executing the process of step S2503.

  In the above configuration, the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state has a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high and low. When the result of the determination is a transition response result, a suggestion effect that suggests a special gaming state or a gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is executed. In such a configuration, the player is strongly interested in whether the first game state or the second game state is taught by the suggestion effect. When the notification is executed and then the operation of the operation means is detected, the first gaming state is suggested. By interposing the operation of the operation means in this way, the player can have a real feeling of participating in the game, and the suggestive effect can be raised.

  However, when the special gaming state or the subsequent gaming state is the first gaming state, the player knows that the player is in the first gaming state before the first gaming state is suggested by the specific effect. Since the player can predict the development of the production after operating the operation means, the predetermined notification for prompting the operation and the act of operating the operation means may be troublesome, and the production effect may be reduced. . In this respect, in this feature, as the specific effect suggesting the first game state, a second effect without the notification is prepared separately from the first effect with the predetermined notification for prompting the operation, and the player makes the first game. In a predetermined situation where it can be determined in advance that the state is in a state, the execution of the first effect is restricted and the second effect is executed, or the second effect is more easily executed than the first effect. ing. Thereby, the troublesomeness with respect to the predetermined notification or operation of the operation means can be reduced, and the ease of playing is improved.

  Note that “restrict the execution of the first effect” in the feature C1 is not to execute the first effect in a predetermined situation, but in the case of not being a predetermined condition in a predetermined situation. Compared to (when the player cannot determine the transition to the first gaming state before suggesting the specific effect), the first effect is less likely to be executed. In the feature C1, the first gaming state or the second gaming state may be different from the normal gaming state, or may be a normal gaming state.

Feature C2. The effect control means executes a predetermined prior effect (display of images shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, display of images shown in FIGS. 27A and 27B) before the execution of the suggestion. Equipped with advance production execution means,
The prior effect executing means executes the prior effect before executing the predetermined notification when executing the first effect, and executes the prior effect even when executing the second effect. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, further comprising:

  Although it is a situation in which it can be determined in advance that the game state is the first gaming state, it is assumed that there is a player who has not been determined or who is not interested in the determination and has not performed the determination. Under such circumstances, in this feature, even when the second effect is executed, the prior effect is executed as in the case of the first effect. Thereby, when a 2nd production is performed instead of a 1st production, it can reduce that the player who has not grasped the 1st game state beforehand has a sense of incongruity, and also with respect to such a player It can be configured with consideration.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the second effect performs the suggestion later than an execution timing of the predetermined notification in the first effect.

  In the above configuration, when the second effect is performed, the first gaming state is suggested after the timing at which the predetermined notification will be executed if the first effect is performed. In this case, a player who has not previously grasped the first gaming state is predicted to be in the first gaming state before the above suggestion based on the fact that it is not performed at the timing when the predetermined notification should be performed. It becomes possible to do. That is, the presence or absence of the predetermined notification functions as an indication of whether or not the first gaming state is present. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine the first gaming state in advance while preventing a player who has previously determined the first gaming state from being bothered with predetermined notification and operation of the operation means. A player who is not playing can enjoy a game that enjoys whether or not a predetermined notification is given in a specific performance, and can be configured with consideration for both players.

Feature C4. An operation valid period setting means for setting an operation valid period for validating the operation of the operation means when the predetermined notification is executed;
The first effect performs the suggestion when the operation of the operation unit is detected within the operation effective period and when the operation effective period elapses without detecting the operation of the operation unit. And
In the second effect, the suggestion is performed earlier than the execution timing of the suggestion when the operation valid period has passed without the operation detecting unit detecting the operation in the first effect. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein

  In the player who is discriminating, since the discrimination is only self-judgment, there is a merit that a sense of security can be obtained by suggesting the first gaming state. For this reason, it is assumed that there is a need for such a player to obtain suggestions. In view of such circumstances, in this feature, when the second effect is executed, the first gaming state is suggested earlier than the end timing of the operation effective period in the first effect. Thereby, the suggestion of the first gaming state is given to the player who knows the first gaming state in advance even though the suggestion timing of the first gaming state is delayed when the second effect is executed. It can suppress waiting too much.

Feature C5. Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, a storage processing execution means for executing a process of storing an operation history of the operation means in a predetermined storage means (operation history storage area 301) when the first effect is executed. (Function to execute effect processing for the round by the effect control device 82),
The production control means includes
In the predetermined situation, restriction determination means for determining whether or not to restrict execution of the first effect based on the operation history in the predetermined storage means (steps S2101 to S2104 by the effect control device 82). Processing function), and
When it is determined that the restriction is determined by the restriction determination means, restriction execution means (function for executing the process of step S2105 by the effect control device 82) for restricting execution of the first effect;
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized by comprising:

  Although it is a predetermined situation in which it can be determined that the player is in the first gaming state before suggesting by the specific performance, it is assumed that there are players who have not been determined or who are not interested in the determination and have not performed the determination. The Under such circumstances, this feature is configured to determine whether or not to limit the execution of the first effect in consideration of not only the predetermined situation but also the operation history of the operation means. . Thereby, the gaming machine can determine whether or not the player has actually discriminated the first gaming state from the player's operation results, and the effect can be changed based on the determination. As a result, for example, only when there is a high possibility that the player has actually discriminated, it is possible to perform an operation such as omitting the operation effect, and a player whose function for the discriminating player has not been discriminated. It is possible to suitably suppress the influence on the game.

  Feature C6. When the restriction determination unit determines whether or not to execute the restriction for the specific effect of the current time, the operation history is the operation performed in the first effect before the current time in the predetermined situation. When the means is not operated and the history corresponds to the operation means being operated in the first presentation before that, it is determined to execute the restriction. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, characterized by:

  In the above configuration, the operating means is not operated in the past first effect in a situation where the first gaming state can be determined in advance, while the operating means is operated in the first effect before that. When there is a track record, the player operated the operating means in accordance with the predetermined notification in the previous first effect, but in the later first effect, the player had previously grasped the first game state. It is presumed that the operating means has not been operated even when the predetermined notification is given. In such a case, it is considered that the player has determined the first game state in advance, and the execution of the first effect is restricted in the current specific effect. That is, in this feature, when a situation in which the first gaming state can be determined in advance has existed in the past, the player actually refers to the operating state of the operating means at that time, so that the player actually It is configured to estimate whether the transition to has been performed in advance and reflect the result in the selection of effects in the current specific effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably switch the production in accordance with the player's actual discrimination situation.

  Feature C7. When the restriction determination unit determines whether or not to execute the restriction for the specific effect of the current time, the operation history is the operation performed in the first effect before the current time in the predetermined situation. When the means is operated and the history corresponds to the operation means being operated in the first presentation before that, it is determined that the restriction is not executed. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or C6, characterized by

  In the above configuration, when there is a record of operating the operating means in both the past first effect under a predetermined situation in which the first gaming state can be determined in advance and the first effect before that. Is regarded as a player who has not previously determined the first gaming state, and does not limit the execution of the first effect. Thereby, although the player has not discriminated in advance the first gaming state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the operation effect is omitted.

  Note that when this feature is applied to the feature C6, the operation effect is omitted when the player preliminarily determines the first gaming state, while the player does not preliminarily determine the first gaming state. In this case, the operation effect can be omitted. That is, the presence / absence of the operation effect can be switched depending on whether or not the player has made a prior determination.

  Feature C8. When the restriction determination unit determines whether or not to execute the restriction for the specific effect of the current time, the operation history is the operation performed in the first effect before the current time in the predetermined situation. When the means is not operated and the history corresponds to the fact that the operating means is not operated in the first production before that, it is determined that the restriction is not executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7.

  If there is a record that the operating means has not been operated in any of the past first production under a predetermined situation in which the first gaming state can be determined in advance and the first production before that, the operation is originally performed. It is highly likely that the player is not willing to operate the means, and it is difficult to estimate from the operation state whether or not the first gaming state has been determined in advance. In this case, by not restricting the execution of the first effect, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconvenience that the operation effect is omitted even though the player has not previously determined the first game state.

  Feature C9. When the restriction determination unit determines whether or not to execute the restriction for the specific effect of the current time, the operation history is the operation performed in the first effect before the current time in the predetermined situation. When it is a history corresponding to the fact that the means has not been operated and the operation means has not been operated in the first production before that, it is determined to execute the restriction. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, characterized by:

  If there is a record that the operating means has not been operated in any of the past first production under a predetermined situation in which the first gaming state can be determined in advance and the first production before that, the operation is originally performed. There is a high possibility that the player is not willing to operate the means, and it is considered that the effectiveness is low even if an operation effect is executed for such a player. Therefore, this feature is not limited to the case where a player can be regarded as a player who has previously determined the first gaming state (feature C6), but also when a player who has no intention to operate is recognized. The execution of the first effect is restricted. As a result, not only for a player who knows the first gaming state in advance, but also for a player who does not intend to operate the operation means, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of predetermined notification and operation of the operation means. Ease is improved.

  Feature C10. Any of the features C5 to C9, further comprising operation history erasing means for erasing the operation history stored in the predetermined storage means in a predetermined case (when the short-time gaming state is completed). Game machines.

  In the above configuration, the history stored in the predetermined storage unit is deleted in a predetermined case. As a result, the history continues to be kept forever. For example, the operation effect when the player plays the game due to the influence of the previous player's operation results is prevented from being excessively restricted. Thus, it is possible to suitably secure an opportunity for executing the operation effect. In addition, since unnecessary histories are sequentially deleted, it is possible to contribute to saving of usage in a predetermined storage means.

  Feature C11. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state.

  In the above configuration, the first gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, and the fact that the first gaming state is known in advance means that the first gaming state is advantageous. You will know. In such a case, the player is actually interested in the advantageous state at the time when the advantageous state can be determined in advance even though the advantageous state (first gaming state) has not been suggested by the specific performance yet. Is assumed to have moved. Under such circumstances, the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C10 eliminates the troublesomeness of the predetermined notification and operation of the operation means, and allows the player to easily enjoy the game.

Feature C12. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
Special gaming state transition means (game state transition processing by the main control device 81) for shifting to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result Function to execute)
Production means (symbol display device 41) capable of producing the production;
A specific effect (first notification effect A, second notification effect B, third notification effect C1, fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, sixth notification effect C4, seventh notification effect D1, Effect control means (function for executing effect determination processing for opening / closing execution mode by the effect control device 82) for performing control so that the eighth notification effect D2, the ninth notification effect D3, and the tenth notification effect D4) are executed;
An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
Notification executing means for executing a predetermined notification (button operation image 408) for prompting the operation of the operation means (a function for executing the 7R probability changing effect determination process by the effect control device 82);
With
The specific effect is an indication of the gaming state after the specific effect is executed,
The gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high (probability gaming state in the first and second embodiments, 15R probability variation big hit result A in the third embodiment) ) And the second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments, 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment) are set. And
The specific effect is the first effect (the fourth notification effect C2, the fifth notification effect C3, the eighth notification) that performs the predetermined notification and performs the suggestion when the operation detection unit detects an operation of the operation unit. A plurality of notification effects D2 and ninth notification effects D3) and a second effect (second notification effect B, sixth notification effect C4, and tenth notification effect D4) for performing the suggestion without executing the predetermined notification. It is selected from various types of performances and executed.
The effect control means is in a predetermined situation in which the player enters the first gaming state after the execution of the specific effect and can determine that the player is in the first gaming state before the suggestion is performed by the specific effect. In addition, there is a restricting means (a function for executing the processing from step S1401 to step S1409, step S1401 from YES to step S2503 by the effect control device 82) that restricts the execution of the first effect as the specific effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the above configuration, the gaming state has the first gaming state and the second gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high, and it is determined in advance which gaming state will be caused by the specific effect. Is suggested. In such a configuration, when the player is strongly interested in whether the first game state or the second game state is taught by the specific effect, a notification that prompts the operation of the operation means when performing those teachings. When the operation of the operating means is detected thereafter, the first gaming state is suggested. By interposing the operation of the operation means in this way, the player can have a real feeling of participating in the game, and the specific effect can be raised.

  However, when the player enters the first gaming state after the execution of the specific effect, if the player knows that the player will be in the first gaming state before the first game state is suggested by the specific effect, Since the player can predict the development of the effect after operating the means, the notification for prompting the operation and the act of operating the operation means may be troublesome, and the effect of the effect may be reduced. In this regard, in this feature, as the specific effect suggesting the first game state, a second effect without the notification is prepared separately from the first effect with the operation notification, and the player makes the first game state. In a predetermined situation where it can be determined in advance, the execution of the first effect is restricted and the second effect is executed, or the second effect is more easily executed than the first effect. Yes. Thereby, the troublesomeness when the player knows in advance that the player is in the first gaming state can be reduced, and the ease of playing is improved.

  Note that “restrict the execution of the first effect” in the feature C12 is not to execute the first effect in a predetermined situation, but in the case of a predetermined situation and not a predetermined situation. Compared to (when the player cannot determine the transition to the first gaming state before suggesting the specific effect), the first effect is less likely to be executed. In the feature C12, the first gaming state or the second gaming state may be different from the normal gaming state or may be the normal gaming state.

  Each configuration described in any of the features C1 to C11 may be applied to this feature. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C12, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E3, the features F1 to F11, and the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
When the result of the transition determination is a transition response result, special game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode (big hit game)) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function for executing the game state transition process), and
A result display means (main display unit 43) capable of performing a transition correspondence result display (display of a stop picture for jackpot) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result;
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low (probability changing gaming state in the first to second embodiments, the first 15R probability variation jackpot result A) in the third embodiment and second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments), 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment ) And multiple gaming states,
The result display means displays the transition response result when the transition determination result is the transition response result and the gaming state after the special gaming state or the special gaming state is the first gaming state. Display of the mode corresponding to the first gaming state (stop pattern of stop result data B1 to B10 in the first and second embodiments, stop pattern of stop result data A in the third embodiment) Is possible,
Specific notification execution means (effect control) for performing specific notification for suggesting the first gaming state when the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state The function of executing the suggestion effect by the device 82),
Storage processing execution means (effect control) for executing processing for storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the transition correspondence result display displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (RAM 244 of the effect control device 82) A function of executing a process of storing stop picture history information by the device 82);
With
The specific notification is to give the suggestion after the result display means starts displaying the transition correspondence result display in a mode corresponding to the first gaming state,
In the case where the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state, the specific notification execution means displays the transition correspondence result before this time stored as the history. In the first case where the same information as the information related to the transition correspondence result display of this time is included in the information regarding the first notification (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, 6 notification effect C4, 10th notification effect D4) is performed, and the information related to the transition response result display before the current time stored as the history is the same as the information related to the current transition response result display. In the second case where no notification is included, the second notification is different from the first notification as the specific notification (fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, eighth notification effect D2, ninth notification effect D3). Game machine characterized by comprising a specific notification control means to be carried out (the ability to effect control device effect determination processing 7R probability variation by 82, the 15R jackpot A for effect determination process execution).

  In the above configuration, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. Informed. However, if the same result display as the transition corresponding result display at that time is performed again in the past when the game state has shifted to the first gaming state, depending on the player, a specific notification may be issued from the comparison of the result displays. It may be possible to determine the transition to the first gaming state before the one gaming state is suggested. In such a case, it is not preferable that the notification in the same manner as before is repeated as the specific notification in order to suppress the tiredness to the game effect and the reduction in attention.

  In this regard, in this feature, a history of information related to the transition correspondence result display is stored, and the history is referred to when the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state. If the information related to the transition response result display before the current time stored as the history includes the same information as the current transition response result display, the first notification is issued as the specific notification. If not included, the second notification different from that is executed. That is, since the mode of the specific notification is changed based on the results of the transition correspondence result display, it is suppressed that the same notification is repeated in a situation where the first gaming state can be determined before the specific notification is performed, It becomes possible to suppress satiety and a reduction in attention.

  In the feature D1, one of the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the normal gaming state or may be the normal gaming state.

  Feature D2. The first notification (second notification effect B, tenth notification effect D4) is more than the second notification (fourth notification effect C2, fifth notification effect C3, eighth notification effect D2, ninth notification effect D3). The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the suggestion is performed at an early stage.

  According to the above configuration, when it is possible to determine that the player enters the first gaming state before the first gaming state is suggested by the specific notification, the first notification is executed, so that the second notification is performed. The first gaming state is notified earlier than the case. That is, since the specific notification ends early, it can be suppressed that the player who knows in advance that the game state is the first gaming state feels troublesome of the specific notification. In addition, if the suggestion is completed early, it is possible to create a free time for the production. For example, when a special production (production different from the first notification and the second notification) is performed using the free time. Can expect the effect of increasing production attention.

Feature D3. The second notification (fifth notification effect C3, ninth notification effect D3) is performed after the notification corresponding to the second gaming state (display of the pseudo result image in FIG. 30A) is performed. The notification corresponding to the gaming state (display of the result video in FIG. 30B) is executed.
The first notification (second notification effect B, fourth notification effect C2, sixth notification effect C4, eighth notification effect D2, tenth notification effect D4) executes notification corresponding to the second gaming state. And the notification corresponding to the first gaming state (display of the image of FIG. 26 (a), display of the result image of FIG. 29 (d) and FIG. 34 (b3)) is executed. A gaming machine according to D1 or D2.

  In the above configuration, in suggesting the first gaming state, the first gaming state is suggested after making the suggestion as if the second gaming state. In this way, by making a configuration that suggests a true result after pretending to be the opposite result, the player can be surprised and the specific notification can be raised. However, if the player knows in advance that the game state is the first gaming state, such appearance may be troublesome, and there is a risk that the effect of the presentation will be reduced. In this regard, in this feature, in the situation where the player can determine in advance that the game state is the first game state, the first game state is suggested without executing the suggestion of the second game state. Can be reduced and the ease of playing is improved.

Feature D4. An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
With
The second notification (the fourth notification effect C2, the fifth notification effect C3, the eighth notification effect D2, the ninth notification effect D3) executes a predetermined notification that prompts the operation means to operate, and the operation detection means When the operation of the operation means is detected, the suggestion is performed.
The first notifications (second notification effect B, sixth notification effect C4, and tenth notification effect D4) provide the suggestion without executing the predetermined notification. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the above configuration, in order to suggest the first game state, a predetermined notification that prompts the operation means to operate is executed, and when the operation means is operated, the first game state is suggested. Thus, by interposing the operation of the operation means, it is possible to give the player a sense of participation in the game, and to increase the specific notification. However, when the player knows in advance that the game state is the first gaming state, the player can predict the development of effects after operating the operation means, so that a predetermined notification or operation means for prompting the operation is provided. The act of operating may be troublesome, and on the contrary, there is a risk that the production effect will be reduced. In this respect, in this feature, in a situation where the player can determine that the first gaming state is to be performed before executing the specific notification, the first gaming state is suggested without executing the predetermined notification. Annoyance can be reduced and ease of playing is improved.

Feature D5. In the special game state, a unit game (round game) can be executed which is ended by a predetermined end condition (elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration, winning of a predetermined upper limit number of game balls). Is,
The number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state includes a first number (7 times in the first to second embodiments, 15 times in the third embodiment), and the first number. A second number (15 times, 3 times in the first to second embodiments, 3 times in the third embodiment) different from the number of
The specific notification control means is configured such that the number of unit games that can be executed in the current special game state is the first number, and the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first number. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein in the case of one gaming state, the first notification or the second notification is executed according to the history.

  According to the above configuration, when the number of unit games that can be executed in the current special game state is the first number, history reference or specific notification switching is executed, and when the number is the second number No history reference is executed. That is, since the history is referred to in a limited state, the frequency of execution of the reference can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load required for these processes as compared to the case where the reference is performed at a high frequency each time the migration response result is obtained.

Feature D6. The transition determination result includes a plurality of types of transition correspondence results (7R probability variation jackpot result and 7R normal jackpot result in the first and second embodiments, 15R probability variation jackpot in the third embodiment as the transition correspondence result. Result A and 15R probability variation jackpot result B) are set,
The plurality of types of migration correspondence results include
A first result in which the number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state is the first number, and the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state ( 7R probability variation jackpot result in the first to second embodiments, 15R probability variation jackpot result A) in the third embodiment, and
A second result in which the number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state is the first number, and the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the second game state ( 7R normal jackpot result in the first to second embodiments, 15R probability variation jackpot result B) in the third embodiment,
The number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state is the second number, and the game state after the special game state or the special game state ends is the first game state or the second game state. A third result (15R probability variation jackpot result in the first to second embodiments, 3R normal jackpot result, 3R normal jackpot result in the third embodiment),
Is included,
The specific notification control means is configured to execute the first notification or the second notification according to the history when the current transition response result is the first result. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the above configuration, when there is a result display and the number of unit games as materials for determining whether or not the player is in the first gaming state, the first result cannot be determined from the number of unit games. The configuration is such that the history is referred to in a limited manner. For example, in a situation where the first game state can be determined from each of the result display and the number of unit games, even if the specific notification mode is determined with reference to the result display history of one of them, the first game state However, according to this feature, it is possible to implement such switching, while reducing the processing load associated with history reference, etc. Is possible.

  Feature D7. A unit game number notification means (round display unit RS) capable of notifying the number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state before the suggestion is performed by the specific notification is provided. A gaming machine according to D6.

  In the above configuration, the player can easily know the number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state, and an environment in which the first game state can be determined from the number of unit games is ensured. As a result, the case where the number of unit games is the second number can be handled separately from the case where the number is the first number, which is a preferable aspect in configuring the feature D6.

Feature D8. An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
With
As the specific notification, a predetermined notification that prompts an operation of the operation means is executed, and an operation presence notification (fourth notification effect) that suggests the first gaming state when the operation detection means detects the operation of the operation means. C2) can be performed,
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, an operation history storage process execution means (effect) for executing a process of storing the operation history of the operation means in the predetermined storage means or a second storage means different from the predetermined storage means. A function to execute a mid-round production process by the control device 82),
The specific notification control means is configured to execute the first notification when the operation history is the first operation history and the operation history is the first operation history. The second notification is executed when the second operation history is different from the operation history (a function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2106 by the effect control device 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7.

  Although the same result display as the past transition correspondence result display in the first gaming state is made, it is not possible to determine in advance that the player is in the first gaming state, or the determination is not made because there is no interest in the determination. It is also assumed that there are players. Under such circumstances, in this feature, when it is possible to determine that the first gaming state is indicated by the specific notification before the first gaming state is suggested, the first notification and the first notification are performed based on the operation history of the operating means. 2 Switching to notification is performed. That is, it is determined in the gaming machine whether or not the player has actually determined the first gaming state from the player's operation results, and the specific notification mode is switched in consideration of the determination. As a result, for example, the operation of executing the first notification is possible only when the player has actually determined, and the game for which the switching function of specific notification for the determined player has not been determined. It is possible to suitably suppress an influence on a person's game.

  Feature D9. In the first operation history, the operation means has not been operated in the previous notification of the operation when the transition result display in the mode corresponding to the first gaming state is performed, and the previous operation history The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the gaming machine is a history corresponding to the operation means being operated in the operation presence notification before.

  In the above configuration, the operation means is not operated in the previous operation presence notification in a situation where the first gaming state can be determined in advance, whereas the operation means is operated in the previous operation notification. When there is a track record, it is estimated that the player who originally has a tendency to operate the operating means did not operate the previous notification of the presence of operation because the player already knew the first gaming state. In such a case, the first notification is executed assuming that the player has previously determined the first gaming state. Accordingly, the first notification can be selectively executed depending on whether or not the player has previously determined the first gaming state, and the notification is switched in accordance with the player's actual determination status. Is possible.

Feature D10. Grant determination means (a function for executing variation start processing by the main control device 81) that executes grant determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
When the result of the grant determination is a grant response result corresponding to grant of a privilege (open / close execution mode (big hit game)), privilege grant means for granting a privilege to the player (execution of game state transition processing by the main control device 81 is executed. Function)
A result display unit (main display unit 43) capable of displaying a result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination;
Production means (design display device 41) capable of performing production,
An operation means (production operation unit 75) that can be operated by the player;
Operation detection means (operation unit detection sensor 75a) capable of detecting that the operation means has been operated;
With
Grant result display displayed as the result display when the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result (stop pattern for 7R probability variation big hit in the first to second embodiments, the third embodiment In the 15R probability variation jackpot stop pattern), multiple types of display modes (stop pattern of stop result data B1 to B10, stop patterns of data A1 and A2) are set as displayable display modes.
When the determination result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, a mode determining means for deciding which of the plural types of display modes is displayed as the grant result display (stop for probability variation big hit by main controller 81) Function to execute the result setting process), and
A process of executing a process of storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the display of the grant result displayed on the result display means in the first storage means (stop picture history storage area 250 of the RAM 244 in the effect control device 82). 1 storage processing execution means (function to execute processing for storing stop pattern history information by the production control device 82);
Based on the detection result of the operation detection means, a second storage processing execution means (effect) for executing a process of storing an operation history of the operation means in the first storage means or a second storage means different from the first storage means. A function of executing the effect processing for the round by the control device 82),
Based on the history stored in the first storage unit and the operation history stored in the first storage unit or the second storage unit, the aspect of the rendering executed by the rendering unit is controlled. Effect control means (function to execute the effect determination process for 7R probability change by the effect control device 82, the process of steps S2101 to S2106),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, the display mode of the grant result display for notifying that the result is the grant correspondence result is selected from a plurality of modes, and the history of the selection result is stored. In addition, operation means that can be operated by the player is provided, and the operation history is stored. And since the aspect of the production is controlled based on the history of the display of the grant results and the operation history of the operation means, the production is selected by an unprecedented novel method, and the interest is improved.

  Each configuration described in any of the above features D1 to D9 may be applied to this feature. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D10, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C12, the features E1 to E3, the features F1 to F11, and the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
When the result of the transition determination is a transition response result, special game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode (big hit game)) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function for executing the game state transition process), and
A result display means (main display unit 43) capable of performing a transition correspondence result display (display of a stop picture for jackpot) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result;
With
The special game state is capable of executing a unit game (round game) that is ended by a predetermined end condition (elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration, winning of a predetermined upper limit number of game balls). And
The transition response result includes at least a first transition response result (7R jackpot result) in which the number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state is the first number, and can be executed in the special game state. A plurality of types of transition correspondence results including a second transition correspondence result (15R jackpot result, 3R jackpot result) in which the number of unit games is a second number different from the first number are set,
When the transition response result is the first transition response result, after the special gaming state, the transition to the first gaming state (probability changing gaming state) in which the expected value that is the transition corresponding result is higher than the normal gaming state And a case where a transition is made to the second gaming state (time-short gaming state) or the normal gaming state in which the expected value is lower than the first gaming state,
When the transition response result is the second transition response result, either the transition to the first gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state or the normal gaming state after the end of the special gaming state And
Production means (design display device 41) capable of performing production,
When the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state, the rendering control unit (the rendering control device) controls the rendering unit so that the specific rendering for suggesting the first gaming state is performed. 82 for performing the opening / closing execution mode effect processing by 82),
Unit game number notification means (round display unit RS) capable of reporting the number of unit games that can be executed in the special game state;
With
The result display means is configured to display the first transition response result when the determination result of the transition determination is the transition response result and the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state. Display of the mode corresponding to the gaming state (display of stop pattern of stop result data B1 to B10 in the first and second embodiments, display of stop pattern of stop result data A in the third embodiment) Is possible,
The specific effect is obtained after the result display means starts displaying the transition correspondence result display in a mode corresponding to the first game state and the unit game number notifying means starts notifying the number of unit games. To make the suggestion,
Storage processing execution means (effect control) for executing processing for storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the transition correspondence result display displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (RAM 244 of the effect control device 82) A function of executing a process of storing stop picture history information by the device 82),
When the transition response result is the first transition response result, the effect control unit refers to the history stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the current transition response result is stored in the history in a predetermined period. When the same information as the display is included, there is provided a changing means (a function of executing a process of storing stop pattern history information by the effect control device 82) that can change the aspect of the specific effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine that can transition to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the player is strongly interested in whether or not to transition to the first gaming state after assigning the transition correspondence result, and the first effect is given by the specific effect. It is possible to enjoy the game with strong expectation that one game state will be suggested. However, in the case of a configuration in which the number of unit games in the special game state corresponds to whether or not to shift to the first game state, for the advanced player who knows in advance, the first game state Transition can be determined from the notification of the number of unit games. In this case, the degree of attention to the specific effect may be reduced.

  In this point, in this feature, when the transition response result is the first transition response result, both when the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state becomes the first gaming state and when the gaming state does not become the first gaming state. Since the possibility arises, it is impossible for the player to know whether or not to shift to the first game state from the notification of the number of unit games. As a result, it is possible to ensure an opportunity for the advanced user to enjoy the specific performance. However, even in such a situation, if the same result display as the transition corresponding result display at that time is performed again in the past while the player has transitioned to the first gaming state, depending on the player, the result display The transition from the comparison to the first gaming state may be determined in advance. In such a case, it is not preferable that the effect of the same mode as before is repeated as the specific effect in order to suppress the tiredness to the game effect and the reduction in attention.

  In view of this point, this feature stores a history of information related to the transition correspondence result display, and when the history information in the predetermined period includes the same information as the current transition correspondence result display, the aspect of the specific effect Can be changed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the same specific effect from being repeated in a situation in which the first game state can be determined from the display of the result display means, and it is possible to suitably suppress the tiredness to the effect and a reduction in attention.

  In addition, in this feature, since the history is referred to when the transition correspondence result is the first transition correspondence result, whether or not the transition to the first gaming state is uncertain from the notification of the number of unit games. The aspect of the specific effect can be changed according to a special situation in which the transition from the display of the result display means to the first gaming state can be determined. In addition, since it is configured to refer to the history and change the mode of specific production limited to some situations, each time it becomes a transition response result, compared to the case where it is frequently referred to such as every time, etc. It becomes possible to reduce the control load required for these processes.

Feature E2. The storage processing execution means
Storage processing start means for starting the history storage processing (function to execute the processing of steps S1203 to S1205 by the effect control device 82);
A storage process ending unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S1105 to S1106 by the effect control device 82) for ending the storage process started by the storage process start unit;
With
The storage processing start means is the state where the storage processing is not started, and when the result of the transition corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state is reached after the special gaming state ends, To start the amnestic process,
The gaming machine according to claim E1, wherein the storage process ending unit is configured to end the storage process when shifting to the normal gaming state in a state where the storage process is started.

  For example, when the information regarding the display of the transition correspondence result is constantly stored, not only the capacity consumption of the storage unit increases, but also the processing load associated with the storage process may increase. In this configuration, as the transition response result is repeated, the information of the transition response result display that shifts to the first gaming state is accumulated in the player, and the transition from the display of the result display means to the first gaming state is determined. Based on the situation that it becomes easy, the storage target period of the history falls into the normal gaming state from the start of the consecutive gaming state triggered by the first hit with the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state It was set as the structure made until the end of. As a result, the aspect of the specific effect for the game situation in which the player can easily determine the first game state from the display of the result display means while saving the usage amount in the storage means and reducing the processing load of the storage process. Can be changed.

Feature E3. The storage processing execution means
Storage processing start means for starting the history storage processing (function to execute the processing of steps S1203 to S1205 by the effect control device 82);
A storage process ending unit (a function for executing the processes of steps S1105 to S1106 by the effect control device 82) for ending the storage process started by the storage process start unit;
With
The storage processing start means starts the storage processing when the result of the transition corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state after the special gaming state is reached in a situation where the storage processing is not started. And
The gaming machine according to claim E1, wherein the storage process ending unit is configured to end the storage process when shifting to the normal gaming state in a state where the storage process is started.

  In the above configuration, as the transition response result is repeated, the transition response result display information for transitioning to the first gaming state is accumulated in the player, and the transition from the display on the result display means to the first gaming state is determined. Based on the circumstances that it becomes easy, the history storage target period is from the start of the extended villa state triggered by the first hit with the transition to the first gaming state to the end of the extended villa state falling to the normal gaming state The configuration. As a result, the aspect of the specific effect for the game situation in which the player can easily determine the first game state from the display of the result display means while saving the usage amount in the storage means and reducing the processing load of the storage process. Can be changed.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E3, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features F1 to F11, and the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Transition determination means for executing a transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (game ball winning to the operation ports 33 and 34) )When,
When the result of the transition determination is a transition response result, special game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode (big hit game)) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function for executing the game state transition process), and
A result display means (main display unit 43) capable of performing a transition correspondence result display (display of a stop picture for jackpot) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition correspondence result;
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low (probability changing gaming state in the first to second embodiments, the first 15R probability variation jackpot result A) in the third embodiment and second gaming state (time-short gaming state (non-probability variation gaming state) in the first to second embodiments), 15R probability variation jackpot result B in the third embodiment ) And multiple gaming states,
When the transition determination result is the transition response result and the gaming state after the special gaming state or the special gaming state is the first gaming state, a plurality of types of display modes (first to second) The display of the stop pattern of the stop result data B1 to B10 in the first embodiment and the display of the stop pattern of the stop result data A in the third embodiment) are determined as the transition corresponding result display. Aspect determining means (function of executing a stop result setting process for probability variation jackpot by the main controller 81),
Storage processing execution means (effect control) for executing processing for storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the transition correspondence result display displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (RAM 244 of the effect control device 82) A function of executing a process of storing stop picture history information by the device 82);
In the case where the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state, the information regarding the transition correspondence result display before the current time stored as the history is included in the current time If the same information regarding the display of the transition correspondence result is included, a notification control means (effect) is provided so that a specific notification (lighting of the light emitting unit 501) is executed before the transition to the first gaming state. A function of executing the specific notification process by the control device 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are provided as the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and when shifting to the first gaming state, the result display means A display corresponding to the first gaming state is displayed as a transition response result display. Under such circumstances, when there is a transition to the first gaming state in the past, and the same result display as the transition corresponding result display at that time is performed again, depending on the player, depending on the comparison between the result displays It is conceivable to determine the transition to the first gaming state. However, the determination in this case is merely self-judgment that relies on the player's memory, and does not exceed the prediction range.

  In view of this point, this feature stores a history of information related to the transition correspondence result display, and information related to the current transition correspondence result display in the information related to the transition correspondence result display prior to the current time stored as the history. Are included, the specific notification is made before the transition to the first gaming state. According to this configuration, when the player determines the transition from the comparison of the result displays to the first gaming state, the player's determination is boosted by the subsequent specific notification. Thereby, as a result of having confidence in the player's own judgment, the sense of accomplishment and superiority that perceive the transition from the display of the result display means to the first gaming state is enhanced, and the interest is improved.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the specific notification is executed after the display of the transition correspondence result display is started.

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed in the order that the specific notification is executed after the transition response result is displayed, and the specific notification function of boosting the determination of the player who has determined the transition from the transition response result display to the first gaming state. It becomes possible to secure it suitably.

  In this feature, “executed after the start of display of the transition correspondence result display” is “executed after a predetermined period from the start of display of the transition correspondence result display” or “after the start of display of the transition correspondence result display and In other words, it is executed at a predetermined timing before the transition to the first gaming state.

  Feature F3. The gaming machine according to claim F1 or F2, wherein the notification control unit includes a unit that makes an execution period of the specific notification shorter than a display period of the transition correspondence result display.

  In the above configuration, since the execution period of the specific notification is a short period, it is suppressed that a player who does not know the specific notification notices the specific notification. As described above, by making it difficult for the player to recognize the presence of the specific notification, the recognition degree of the specific notification for a general player can be kept low. Thereby, it is possible to know the person who knows the specific notification, and it is possible to further enhance the superiority of the player who is convinced of the transition to the first gaming state by the specific notification. Moreover, since it is difficult for a general player to notice the specific notification, an effect of suppressing the specific notification from interfering with the enjoyment of the game can be expected.

  Note that the “execution period for displaying the transition correspondence result” of this feature is not necessarily limited to the execution period (stop display period) in the game times. For example, when the transition correspondence result display is continuously displayed even after the game is over, it can be understood that the total display period including the continuous display period corresponds to the “execution period of transition correspondence result display”. .

  In addition, this feature can be rephrased as “comprising a means that after the execution of the specific notification is started, the specific notification is ended before the end of the transition correspondence result display”.

  Feature F4. The notification control means is configured to cause the specific notification to be executed according to a predetermined condition (lottery) when the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the specific notification can be executed not only when shifting to the first gaming state but also when shifting to the second gaming state. Thereby, it is not sufficient that the specific notification is performed in order to determine the transition to the first gaming state, the current transition correspondence result display is the same as the past result display, and the specific notification is performed. Only when this is set, the transition to the first gaming state is determined. In this case, even if a general player notices the presence of the specific notification, it becomes difficult to perceive the meaning, and it is possible to favorably secure the superiority of the player who knows the meaning of the specific notification. In addition, since the status of the transition correspondence result display is also a requirement for confirming the transition, it is possible to suppress a situation where it is sufficient to pay attention only to the specific notification, and a preferable aspect for improving the degree of attention to the result display means. It becomes.

  In addition, this feature is that “the notification control unit is configured according to a predetermined condition (lottery) even when the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is not the first gaming state. In other words, it is provided with means for enabling the specific notification to be executed.

  Feature F5. The notification control means relates to the transition correspondence result display before the current time stored as the history even when the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state. Any of the features F1 to F4, characterized in comprising means for preventing the specific notification from being executed when the information does not include the same information as the current transition correspondence result display. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, even if the current transition response result display is performed in the display corresponding to the transition to the first gaming state, if the same display has not been displayed in the past, the specific notification Will not be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation where it is sufficient to pay attention to only the specific notification, and it is possible to suppress a reduction in attention to the result display unit. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the specific notification, and it is possible to increase the rarity of the specific notification.

Feature F6. Production means (design display device 41) capable of performing production,
When the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the first gaming state, specific effects (fourth notification effect C2 and fifth notification effect C3) for suggesting the first gaming state are performed. Effect control means for controlling the effect means (function to execute effect processing for opening / closing execution mode by the effect control device 82);
The specific effect is to make the suggestion after the result display means starts displaying the transition corresponding result display of the aspect corresponding to the first gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the specific notification is executed before the suggestion is performed by the specific effect.

  In the above configuration, apart from the specific notification, a specific effect suggesting a transition to the first gaming state is executed by the effect means. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately notify the general player who does not determine the transition from the display of the result display means to the first gaming state or does not know the specific notification of the transition to the first gaming state. Is possible. At this time, in this feature, the specific notification is performed before the first game state is suggested by the specific effect. Thereby, the player who is sure of the transition to the first gaming state by the specific notification can be sure of the transition to the first gaming state earlier than the general player who is not. That is, it is possible to favorably secure the superiority of the specific player while suppressing the influence on the game of the general player.

Feature F7. Production means (design display device 41) capable of performing production,
It comprises a notification means (light emitting unit 501) that is different from the presentation means and can perform notification.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, wherein the notification control unit is configured to cause the specific notification to be executed by the notification unit.

  In the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by the notification unit provided separately from the production unit. Since it is assumed that a general player concentrates on the production | presentation by the production | presentation means, it can make it difficult for a general player to notice a specific alert | report by setting it as the structure of this characteristic. Thereby, the recognition degree of the specific notification in a general player can be kept low, and the person who knows the specific notification can know. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the superiority of the player who is convinced of the transition to the first gaming state by the specific notification. Moreover, since it is difficult for a general player to notice the specific notification, an effect of suppressing the specific notification from interfering with the enjoyment of the game can be expected.

Feature F8. A light emitting unit (light emitting unit 501) as the notification unit;
The specific notification is to switch the light emitting means from one of a light emitting state and a non-light emitting state to the other of the light emitting state and the non-light emitting state, or to change the light emitting state of the light emitting means. The gaming machine according to Feature F7.

  According to the above configuration, specific notification can be performed with a simple configuration. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the designer at the time of designing the gaming machine and the processing load on the control as compared with the case where the specific notification is made by, for example, a moving image.

  Feature F9. The gaming machine according to F7 or F8, wherein the notification unit is arranged at a location closer to the result display unit than the presentation unit in a front view from the front of the gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, for the player who determines the transition from the transition response result display to the first gaming state, the gaze movement from the result display means can be reduced so that the notification means can be visually recognized and the miss of specific notification is suppressed. can do. On the other hand, for the general player who does not determine the transition from the display of the result display means to the first gaming state or does not know the specific notification, the notification means becomes difficult to see and is specified for enjoying the game. It is possible to prevent the notification from interfering.

Feature F10. Providing presentation means (symbol display device 41) having a production section (display screen G) capable of production,
The result display means includes a display unit (first result display unit AS, second result display unit BS) capable of performing the transition correspondence result display,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the display unit is smaller than the effect unit.

  In the said structure, the display part in which a transition corresponding | compatible result display is displayed is formed smaller than the production | presentation part in an effect means, and it is hard to stand out from a player. By adopting such a configuration, a player who wants to enjoy a game without discriminating the transition from the transition response result display to the first gaming state can easily prevent the transition response result display from being viewed. .

Feature F11. A first display unit as the display unit;
A second display unit as the production unit;
With
The first display unit can perform a first result display (stop pattern) as the transition correspondence result display,
The second display unit can display a second result (a main symbol and a sub symbol displayed on the display screen G) corresponding to the transition correspondence result and different from the first result display. There is a gaming machine according to Feature F10.

  In the above configuration, the result display corresponding to the result of the shift determination (second result display) is performed separately from the first display part of the result display means in the second display part of the effect means. Thus, a player who wants to enjoy a game without determining the transition from the transition response result display to the first gaming state does not have to look at the first display part of the result display means by looking at the second display part. It becomes possible to know the result of the transition determination. Moreover, since the second result display performed on the second display unit is different from the first result display performed on the first display unit, even if the second display unit is viewed, the first display unit is displayed. It becomes impossible to grasp the display of the migration response result displayed on the screen. Accordingly, it is possible to respond to a player's request that does not want to know the transition to the first gaming state from the transition corresponding result display while appropriately informing the result of the transition determination.

  In this feature, “result display means” may be referred to as “first result display means”, and “production means” may be referred to as “second result display means”. In this case, the second result display means is “a second result having a second display unit corresponding to the result of the transition determination and capable of performing a second result display different from the first result display. It can be expressed as “display means”.

  Further, in the present feature, it may further include a feature that “a means for displaying the second result display larger than the first result display” is provided. In this case, by emphasizing the second result display, the presence of the first result display displayed on the result display means is diluted, and the transition correspondence result display can be made less noticeable.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features F1 to F11, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E3, and the features G1 to G13. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Transition determination means (executes variation start processing by the main control device 81) that performs transition determination (winning lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition (winning game balls to the operation ports 33, 34). Function)
When the result of the transition determination is a transition response result, special game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode (big hit game)) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function for executing the game state transition process), and
A result display unit (main display unit 43) capable of displaying a result corresponding to the result of the transition determination;
In a predetermined case (when a normal jackpot result is obtained), a specific gaming state that is different from the special gaming state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special gaming state is ended Specific game state control means (function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81) to be shifted to (time-short game state);
With
Transition correspondence result display displayed as the result display when the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result (stop pattern for 7R normal jackpot result in the fifth embodiment, stop pattern for 3R normal jackpot result ) Is set with a plurality of display modes (stop result data C1 to C6, D1, D2) as displayable display modes,
In the case where the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the mode determination means for deciding which of the plurality of types of display modes is displayed as the transition correspondence result display (stopping for normal jackpot by the main control device 81) Function to execute the result setting process), and
A process of storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the transition correspondence result display displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (stop picture history storage area 302 of the RAM 204 in the main control device 81) is executed. Storage processing execution means (function for executing the processing of step S2701 by the main control device 81);
With
The specific game state control means executes an end means for ending the specific game state when the end condition is satisfied in a situation where the game state is in the specific game state (execution transition processing by the main control device 81) Function)
The end condition includes a plurality of types including a first end condition (the end reference number is 100 times) and a second end condition (the end reference number is 50 times) in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high. End condition is set,
The specific game state control means is configured such that when the history in the predetermined storage means is a first history (when the current stop picture is the same as the stop picture at the previous normal jackpot result), the end condition is When the first end condition is satisfied and the history in the predetermined storage means is a second history different from the first history (when the current stop pattern is different from the stop pattern at the previous normal jackpot result) A gaming machine comprising an end condition setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2803 to S2807 by the main control device 81) so that the condition becomes the second end condition.

  In the above configuration, the transition determination result becomes a transition response result, so that a transition is made to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and in a predetermined case, the special gaming state is different and advantageous to the player. Transition to a specific game state. For this reason, the player can play a game in expectation of the transition to the specific gaming state together with the transition response result. The specific game state ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in this feature, the transition correspondence result display history displayed when the transition determination result is the transition correspondence result is stored, and the history is stored in the history. Based on this, the end condition is changed. That is, as the end condition, there are a first end condition and a second end condition at which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high, and these are selectively set according to the history situation It has become. In other words, the game development after the transition to the specific game state changes depending on what transition response result display is assigned. As a result, it is not limited to games that only expect to become transition response results or to shift to a specific gaming state, but games that enjoy what transition response result display and what history status will be displayed. It can be added, and it adds a new level of fun. Therefore, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and increase the game motivation. In addition, the player's interest in the result display displayed on the result display means can be increased, and an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be expected.

  Feature G2. The first history includes a predetermined combination of information related to the current transition response result display and information related to the transition response result display before this time in a predetermined game period (both information are the same, both information are predetermined. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is a specific combination.

  In the above configuration, the information regarding the current transition response result display and the information regarding the transition response result display before this time in a predetermined game period form a predetermined combination, so that the end condition of the specific gaming state is the first end Set to the condition. Thereby, the game which enjoys what kind of those both displays becomes a combination can be provided.

  In addition, in this feature, “information related to the display of the transition response result before the current time in the predetermined game period” is rephrased as “information related to the display of the transfer response result before the current time stored in the predetermined storage unit”. May be.

  Feature G3. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein in the predetermined combination, the information related to the current transition response result display and the information related to the transition response result display prior to the current time are the same.

  In the above configuration, when the information regarding the current transition response result display and the information regarding the transition response result display before this time are the same, the end condition of the specific gaming state is set as the first end condition. Thereby, it is possible to give a game for enjoying whether or not the current transition response result display is the same as the past transition response result display. In addition, it can be expected that the player can easily determine whether or not a condition for satisfying the first end condition is satisfied. In other words, if it is a configuration that becomes the first end condition by becoming a specific combination other than the above-mentioned indications, it is necessary for the player to know the combination pattern in advance. For example, it is only necessary to compare whether or not the current transition response result display is the same as the past transition response result display, and the player can easily understand the configuration.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the first termination condition is more advantageous to the player than the second termination condition.

  In the above configuration, since the first end condition is more advantageous than the second end condition, the player who is the first history than the second history is the history of information related to the display of the transition correspondence result. It is advantageous for. Accordingly, it is possible to provide fun to play in the hope that the history becomes the first history.

Feature G5. The result display means has a display part (first result display part AS or second result display part BS) capable of performing the result display,
Providing presentation means (symbol display device 41) having a production section (display screen G) capable of production,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the display unit is formed smaller than the effect unit.

  In the said structure, the display part in which a transition corresponding | compatible result display is displayed is formed smaller than the production | presentation part in an effect means, and it is hard to stand out from a player. By adopting a configuration that uses such an inconspicuous display history, a player who wants to enjoy a specific gaming state without grasping the end condition from the transition response result display does not easily see the transition response result display. Can be.

Feature G6. A first display unit as the display unit;
A second display unit as the production unit;
With
The first display unit can perform a first result display (stop pattern) as the result display,
The second display unit corresponds to the result of the transition determination and can perform a second result display (a main symbol and a sub symbol displayed on the display screen G) different from the first result display. The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein:

  In the above configuration, the result display corresponding to the result of the shift determination (second result display) is performed separately from the first display part of the result display means in the second display part of the effect means. Thereby, the player who wants to enjoy the specific gaming state without grasping the end condition from the transition correspondence result display can see the transition determination without looking at the first display section of the result display means by looking at the second display section. It becomes possible to know the result. Moreover, since the second result display performed on the second display unit is different from the first result display performed on the first display unit, even if the second display unit is viewed, the first display unit is displayed. It is impossible to grasp the history of the migration response result display displayed in. Accordingly, it is possible to respond to a player's request that does not want to know the end condition of the specific gaming state in advance while appropriately informing the result of the transition determination.

  In this feature, “result display means” may be referred to as “first result display means”, and “production means” may be referred to as “second result display means”. In this case, the second result display means is “a second result having a second display unit corresponding to the result of the transition determination and capable of performing a second result display different from the first result display. It can be expressed as “display means”.

  Further, in the present feature, it may further include a feature that “a means for displaying the second result display larger than the first result display” is provided. In this case, by emphasizing the second result display, the presence of the first result display displayed on the result display means is diluted, and the transition correspondence result display can be made less noticeable.

Feature G7. A plurality of types of transition correspondence results (15R probability variation jackpot result, 7R probability variation jackpot result, 7R normal jackpot result and 3R regular jackpot result) are set in the transition correspondence result,
The specific gaming state control means ends the special gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a predetermined transition correspondence result (7R normal jackpot result, 3R normal jackpot result) among the plurality of types of transition correspondence results. The later gaming state is the specific gaming state,
The first history is information about the transition response result display corresponding to the transition response result when the transition response result is obtained in the state of the specific gaming state, and the information before the transition response result. In any one of the characteristics G1 to G6, the information regarding the transition response result display corresponding to the predetermined transition response result triggered by the specific gaming state is a predetermined combination. The gaming machine described.

  In the above configuration, the end condition is set according to the combination of the transition response result display when the transition response result is obtained during the specific gaming state and the transition response result display immediately before. As a result, it is possible to prevent the end condition from being changed according to the game result of the previous player, or the game result of the player to affect the end condition when the next player is the player. In other words, the specific game state is an advantageous state for the player, and while the player is in that state, it is difficult for the player to stop the game, and the player is unlikely to change. For this reason, it can be set as the structure from which an end condition changes according to the log | history condition of a transition corresponding | compatible result display in the same player (one player) by setting it as the structure of this characteristic.

  Feature G8. The specific game state includes a first state (high frequency support mode) in which the determination condition per unit period is likely to be established more frequently than the normal game state, and a probability that the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result. The gaming machine according to Feature G7, wherein the gaming machine is in at least one of a second state (high probability mode) in which the game is higher than the normal gaming state.

  In the first state or the second state, the transition correspondence result is more likely to occur than in the normal gaming state, so that it is difficult for the player to stop the game and the player is less likely to change. In addition, in those states, the period until the transition response result is generated is likely to be shortened, so that the player can easily remember the transition response result display before this time. This makes it easier for the player to compare the current transition response result display with the previous transition response result display, and a practically preferable aspect for the configuration of the feature G7. it can.

  Feature G9. In the case of the specific game state, a notification means (effect control device 82) for performing a specific notification (production of the second mode during the game) that enables the player to recognize that the game is in the specific game state. The gaming machine according to the feature G7 or G8, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function in which the playing mode during game play is a second mode.

  According to the above-described configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from changing without changing the game without noticing that the player is in the specific game state.

  Feature G10. The storage processing execution means includes an erasure means (a function of executing the process of step S2901 by the main control device 81) for erasing the history stored in the predetermined storage means when the specific gaming state is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features G7 to G9, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the specific gaming state ends, the history stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased, so that only the history until the specific gaming state ends exists in the predetermined storage unit. Become. For example, in the configuration in which the history remains, processing for managing when each history is necessary (for example, storing the date and time of the history) is required. According to this configuration, such processing is performed. Is no longer necessary. For this reason, it is possible to manage the history with a simple configuration and reduce the processing load of history management. In addition, since unnecessary histories are sequentially deleted, it is possible to contribute to saving of usage in a predetermined storage means.

  Feature G11. The device according to any one of the features G1 to G10, further comprising means for restricting execution of the transition determination during execution of the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S301 by the main control device 81). Game machines.

  For example, if the transition determination is performed during execution of the special gaming state and a new result display is performed, there is a possibility that the history of information related to the transition response result display may be updated (changed). However, it becomes necessary to keep paying attention to the display of the result display means, and it becomes difficult to concentrate on the special game state. In this regard, in this configuration, since the new history of the result display does not occur during the execution of the special gaming state (the history is not updated / changed), the player can change the special gaming state without worrying about the history change. It becomes possible to play.

Feature G12. A transition determination means (a function for executing a variation start process by the main control device 81) for executing a transition determination (whether or not lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition;
When the result of the transition determination is a transition response result, special game state transition means (by the main control device 81) for transitioning to a special game state (open / close execution mode (big hit game)) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A function for executing the game state transition process), and
A result display unit (main display unit 43) capable of displaying a result corresponding to the result of the transition determination;
In a predetermined case (when a normal jackpot result is obtained), a specific gaming state that is different from the special gaming state and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the special gaming state is ended Specific game state control means (function for executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode by the main control device 81) to be shifted to (time-short game state);
With
Transition correspondence result display displayed as the result display when the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result (stop pattern for 7R normal jackpot result in the fifth embodiment, stop pattern for 3R normal jackpot result ) Is set with a plurality of display modes (stop result data C1 to C6, D1, D2) as displayable display modes,
In the case where the result of the transition determination is the transition correspondence result, the mode determination means for deciding which of the plurality of types of display modes is displayed as the transition correspondence result display (stopping for normal jackpot by the main control device 81) Function to execute the result setting process), and
A process of storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the transition correspondence result display displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (stop picture history storage area 302 of the RAM 204 in the main control device 81) is executed. Storage processing execution means (function for executing the processing of step S2701 by the main control device 81);
With
The specific gaming state control means includes
Ending means (function for executing transition processing at the time of disconnection by the main control device 81) for ending the specific gaming state when the ending condition is satisfied in a situation where the gaming state is in the specific gaming state;
An end condition setting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2803 to S2807 by the main control device 81) for setting the end condition based on the history stored in the predetermined storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the above configuration, the transition determination result becomes a transition response result, so that a transition is made to a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and in a predetermined case, the special gaming state is different and advantageous to the player. Transition to a specific game state. For this reason, the player can play a game in expectation of the transition to the specific gaming state together with the transition response result. The specific game state ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in this feature, the transition correspondence result display history displayed when the transition determination result is the transition correspondence result is stored, and the history is stored in the history. Based on this, the end condition is changed. That is, the game development after the transition to the specific game state changes depending on what transition response result display is assigned. As a result, it is not limited to games that only expect to become transition response results or to shift to a specific gaming state, but games that enjoy what transition response result display and what history status will be displayed. It can be added, and it adds a new level of fun. Therefore, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and increase the game motivation. In addition, the player's interest in the result display displayed on the result display means can be increased, and an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be expected.

  In addition, you may apply each structure as described in the said characteristics G1 thru | or G11 with respect to this characteristic. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

Feature G13. Grant determination means (a function for executing fluctuation start processing by the main control device 81) for executing grant determination (a jackpot type distribution process) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A privilege granting means (main control device 81) that grants a privilege to the player when the result of the grant determination is a grant response result (7R normal jackpot result, 3R normal jackpot result) corresponding to grant of a privilege (short-time gaming state). Function to execute the transition process at the end of the opening and closing execution mode by)
A result display unit (main display unit 43) capable of displaying a result corresponding to the result of the determination of grant,
With
Grant corresponding result display displayed as the result display when the result of the grant determination is a grant corresponding result corresponding to grant of the privilege (7R normal jackpot result stop pattern in the fifth embodiment, 3R normal In the jackpot result stop picture), a plurality of display modes (stop result data C1 to C6, D1, and D2 stop pictures) are set as displayable display modes.
In the case where the result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result, a mode decision means for deciding which of a plurality of types of display modes is displayed as the grant correspondence result display (stopping for normal jackpot by the main control device 81) Function to execute the result setting process), and
A process of storing a history of information (stop picture information) related to the display of the assignment correspondence result displayed on the result display means in a predetermined storage means (stop picture history storage area 302 of the RAM 204 in the main control device 81) is executed. Storage processing execution means (function for executing the processing of step S2701 by the main control device 81);
With
When the history in the predetermined storage means is the first history (when the current stop picture is the same as the stop picture at the time of the previous normal jackpot result), the privilege granting means is the first privilege ( When the end reference count is 100 times) and the history in the predetermined storage means is a second history different from the first history (the current stop picture is the result of the previous normal jackpot result) Means (step S2803-steps by the main control device 81) for giving a second privilege (short game state when the end reference count is 50) different from the first privilege as the privilege when different from the stop picture A gaming machine having a function of executing the processing of S2807.

  In the said structure, a privilege is provided to a player because the result of grant determination turns into a grant corresponding result. For this reason, the player can play a game with the expectation that the result of granting will be obtained. Under such a configuration, this feature is configured to store a history of the display of the corresponding correspondence result displayed when the result of the determination of grant is the corresponding response result, and change the type of privilege based on the history. ing. That is, it has the 1st privilege and the 2nd privilege, and has composition which is given selectively according to the situation of a history. As a result, it is possible to give a game that allows users to enjoy what kind of grant response result is displayed and what kind of history situation it is not limited to a game that simply expects to be a grant response result. Unprecedented interest is added. Therefore, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and increase the game motivation. In addition, the player's interest in the result display displayed on the result display means can be increased, and an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be expected.

  Each configuration described in any of the above features G1 to G12 may be applied to this feature. In this case, the further effect by having applied each structure can be show | played.

  In addition, for each configuration of the features G1 to G13, the configuration is any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C12, the features D1 to D10, the features E1 to E3, and the features F1 to F11. It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown above, or to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  In addition, the technical idea shown in each invention of each of the above-described features A to G may be applied to each invention of each of the features A to G. You may apply with respect to each invention of G group. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the inventions of the features A to G.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type gaming machine (ball-use spinning-type game machine): It is equipped with variable display means that displays a final stop display of a symbol row after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, resulting from the operation of the starting operation means. The game starts on the condition that the change of the symbol is started, the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A special game state (bonus game etc.) that is advantageous to the user, and a throwing device for performing a throwing process for taking a game ball from the ball tray and providing a game ball to the ball tray. A gaming machine comprising: a payout device that performs the operation of the starting operation means when a game ball is thrown by the throwing device.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Symbol display apparatus, 43 ... Main display part, 75 ... Production operation part, 81 ... Main control apparatus, 82 ... Production control apparatus, 250 ... Stop picture history storage area, AS ... 1st result display Part, BS ... second result display part, G ... display screen.

Claims (8)

A transition determination means for performing transition determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when the result of the transition determination is a transition correspondence result;
With
As the special gaming state or the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, there are a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively high or low. And
Production means capable of performing production,
When the transition determination result is the transition-corresponding result, an effect for controlling the special game state or a specific effect for suggesting a game state after the special game state is completed to be performed by the effect means. Control means;
With
The specific effect is a first effect that suggests the first gaming state, a second effect that suggests the second gaming state, and the first gaming state, and the execution of the second effect. It is selected and executed from a plurality of types of effects including a third effect to be performed later,
The effect control means is configured such that the special game state or the game state after the end of the special game state is the first game state, and the player makes the first game state before the suggestion is performed by the specific effect. A gaming machine, comprising: a restricting unit that restricts execution of the third effect as the specific effect in a predetermined situation in which it can be determined. The effect control means includes means for executing a predetermined prior effect before the execution of each effect in each of the case of executing the first effect and the case of executing the second effect.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the restricting unit includes a unit that restricts execution of the preliminary effect in the predetermined situation.   When the execution of the third effect is restricted by the restriction means, the effect control means is different from the first effect or the first effect as the specific effect and suggests the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising means for executing a fourth effect. When the execution of the third effect is restricted by the restricting means, the effect control means executes the fourth effect as the specific effect, or the fourth effect is executed more than the first effect. It is easy to be done,
The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the fourth effect is the suggestion earlier than the first effect. Storage processing execution means for executing processing for storing a history of information relating to game results in a predetermined storage means;
Situation determination means for determining whether or not the predetermined situation is based on the history stored in the predetermined storage means;
With
The said restriction | limiting means restrict | limits that the said 3rd effect is performed as the said specific effect, when it determines with the said predetermined situation by the said condition determination means. 4. The gaming machine according to any one of 4. A result display means capable of displaying a transition response result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination being the transition response result;
The specific effect is to make the suggestion after the display of the transition correspondence result display,
A storage process execution unit that executes a process of storing a history of information related to the migration correspondence result displayed on the result display unit in a predetermined storage unit;
The restricting means restricts execution of the third effect as the specific effect when the history in the predetermined storage means is a predetermined history corresponding to the predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. In a predetermined case, after the end of the special gaming state, a first state in which a probability that the result of the transition determination becomes the transition corresponding result is higher than the normal gaming state, and the establishment frequency of the condition per unit period is A specific gaming state transition means for shifting to a specific gaming state that is at least one of a second state that is likely to be higher than the normal gaming state;
The storage processing execution means includes means for starting storage of the history when the result of the transfer correspondence corresponding to the shift to the specific gaming state is obtained in a situation where the storage of the history is not started. The gaming machine according to claim 6. The storage processing execution means
Storage ending means for ending storage of the history when a predetermined predetermined termination condition is satisfied;
A history erasure unit for erasing the history stored in the predetermined storage unit when the storage of the history is terminated by the storage end unit;
The gaming machine according to claim 6 or 7, further comprising:

Images